- Manuals
- Brands
- Mercedes-Benz
- Car
- S-Class
- Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual PDF
Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Familiarize yourself with the con tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.
Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.
2235845404Y 2235845404
Order no. P223 0181 13 Part no. 223 584 54 04 Edition F 2021
S-Class Operator's Manual
Mercedes-BenzMe rce
de s-B
en z
S-C las
s
Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
As at 06.07.20
Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment
R Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company
2235845404
2235845404
Symbols ........................................................ 5
At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 8 Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera): ....................................................... 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 16 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 18 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment ................................................ 20 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 22
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 24 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 24
General notes ............................................. 25 Protection of the environment ...................... 25 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 25 Operator's Manual ........................................ 26 Touch-sensitive controls ............................... 27 Service and vehicle operation ....................... 27 Operating safety ........................................... 28
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ..................................... 30 Diagnostics connection ................................ 31 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 32 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 33 Notes for persons with electronic medi cal aids ......................................................... 33 Problems with your vehicle ........................... 33 Reporting safety defects ............................... 34 Limited Warranty .......................................... 35 QR code for rescue card ............................... 35 Data storage ................................................. 35 Copyright ...................................................... 40
Occupant safety ......................................... 41 Restraint system ........................................... 41 Seat belts ..................................................... 43 Airbags ......................................................... 48 PRE-SAFE system ....................................... 58 Automatic measures after an accident ......... 60 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ................................................................ 60 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 74
Opening and closing .................................. 75 SmartKey ...................................................... 75 Doors ............................................................ 80 Trunk ............................................................ 84 Side windows ................................................ 91 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 95 Roller sun blinds ......................................... 100 Anti-theft protection ................................... 102
Seats and stowing ................................... 105 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi tion ............................................................. 105 Seats .......................................................... 105 Steering wheel ............................................ 125 Easy entry and exit feature ......................... 127 Memory function ........................................ 128 Memory function in the rear passenger compartment .............................................. 130 Stowage areas ............................................ 133 Cup holder .................................................. 144 Sockets ....................................................... 144 Refrigerator box .......................................... 147 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .. 149
2 Contents
Installing and removing the floor mats ........ 152
Light and visibility ................................... 154 Exterior lighting .......................................... 154 Interior lighting ........................................... 164 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 167 Mirrors ........................................................ 171 Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield ................................................... 174 Infrared-reflective windshield function ........ 174
Climate control ......................................... 175 Overview of climate control systems .......... 175 Operating the climate control system ......... 176
Driving and parking ................................. 187 Driving ........................................................ 187 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 198 Automatic transmission .............................. 201 Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 205 Refueling .................................................... 205 Parking ....................................................... 207
Driving and driving safety systems .............. 215 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 272
Driver display ........................................... 273 Notes on the driver display ......................... 273 Notes on the 3D driver display ................... 273 Operating the driver display ........................ 273 Menus on the driver display ........................ 274 Head-up Display ......................................... 275 Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology) .................... 278 Overview of status displays on the driver display ........................................................ 279
MBUX multimedia system ...................... 280 Overview and operation .............................. 280 System settings .......................................... 294 Navigation and traffic ................................. 297 Telephone ................................................... 304 Mercedes me and apps .............................. 307 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... 314 Radio & media ............................................. 317 Sound settings ........................................... 323
Maintenance and care ............................. 324 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ......... 324 Engine compartment .................................. 325 Cleaning and care ....................................... 330
Breakdown assistance ............................ 337 Emergency .................................................. 337 Flat tire ....................................................... 338 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 344 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 350 Electrical fuses ........................................... 354
Wheels and tires ...................................... 358 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 358 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 358 Notes on snow chains ................................ 359 Activating or deactivating snow chain mode .......................................................... 359 Tire pressure .............................................. 360 Loading the vehicle .................................... 365 Tire labeling ................................................ 369 Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 374
Contents 3
Changing a wheel ....................................... 377 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 386
Technical data .......................................... 387 Notes on technical data .............................. 387 Vehicle electronics ..................................... 387 Radio operating permits for vehicle com ponents ...................................................... 389 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ 466 Operating fluids .......................................... 468 Vehicle data ................................................ 476
Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps ............................................... 478 Display messages ....................................... 478 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 530
Index ......................................................... 548
4 Contents
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol lowing symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Messages in the central display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause
Symbols 5
Left-hand-drive vehicles
6 At a glance Cockpit
1 Light switch 154
2 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 203
3 Combination switch 155
4 Driver display 273
5 DIRECT SELECT lever 201
6 Start/stop button 188
ECO start/stop function 196
7 Central display 280
8 Glove box 135
9 Storage compartment 135
A Control panel for:
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 199
c Active Parking Assist 267
\ Quick vehicle access
Fingerprint sensor 280
Switching the MBUX multimedia system on/off
280
a Switching sound on/off 280
Adjusting the volume 280
B Hazard warning light system 156
C Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem
282
D Adjusting the steering wheel 125
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
126
E Control panel:
Driver display 273
H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 226
F Diagnostics connection 31
G M Opening the hood 325
H ! Electric parking brake 211
At a glance Cockpit 7
Driver display (standard)
8 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
1 #! Turn signal lights 155
2 Suspension (red) 542
Suspension (yellow) 542
3 # Electrical malfunction 535
4 Power steering (red) 533
Power steering (yellow) 533
Rear-axle steering (red) 533
Rear-axle steering (yellow) 533
5 6 Restraint system 531
6 Seat belt 531
7L Distance warning 542
8 ! ABS 543
9 h Tire pressure monitoring system 546
A ; Check Engine 535
B ESP OFF 543
ESP 543
CH Mercedes me connect 546
D Coolant temperature 535
E Coolant temperature display
F ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 539
G Electric parking brake (red) 539
F USA only
! Canada only
H Brakes (red) 539
$ USA only
J Canada only
Recuperative Brake System, USA only 539
J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 539
I 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator
535
J Fuel level
K K High beam 155
L Low beam 154
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 9
T Parking lamps 154 L R Rear fog light 155
10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
Driver display with driver camera
12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera):
1 #! Turn signal lights 155
2 Seat belt 531
3L Distance warning 542
4 6 Restraint system 531
5 h Tire pressure monitoring system 546
6 ESP OFF 543
ESP 543
7 ! ABS 543
8H Mercedes me connect 546
9 Coolant temperature 535
A Coolant temperature display
B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 539
C Electric parking brake (red) 539
F USA only
! Canada only
D Brakes (red) 539
$ USA only
J Canada only
Recuperative Brake System, USA only 539
J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 539
E 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator
535
F Fuel level
G R Rear fog lamp 155
H K High beam 155
L Low beam 154
T Parking lamps 154
I # Electrical malfunction 535
J ; Check Engine 535
K Power steering (red) 533
Power steering (yellow) 533
Rear axle steering (red) 533
Rear axle steering (yellow) 533
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera): 13
L Suspension (red) 542 Suspension (yellow) 542
14 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera):
16 At a glance Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors
2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off
164
3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
164
4; me button 309
5D Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel rear roller sunblind
95
6 | Switches automatic interior lighting con trol on/off
164
7 G SOS button 309
8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off
164
9 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
95
3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel front roller sunblind
95
A Indicator lamps:
PASSENGER AIR BAG 53
REAR SEAT AIR BAG 58
B Inside rearview mirror 172
C p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off
164
At a glance Overhead control panel 17
18 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment
1 Locks/unlocks the vehicle 80
2 Adjusts the seats electrically 105
3w Switches the seat heating on/off 123
4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off 125
5 w Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driver's seat
108
6 Operates the memory function 129
7 Operates the outside mirrors 171
8 W Opens/closes the right side window 91
9 W Opens/closes the rear right side win dow
91
A p Opens/closes the trunk lid 84
BD Rear window roller sunblind 100
CS Child safety lock for the rear side win dows
73
D Opens the door 80
E W Opens/closes the rear left side window 91
F W Opens/closes the left side window 91
G Adjusts the head restraints 117
H Seat adjustment using the multimedia system 121
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 19
Vehicles with a reclining rear seat
20 At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment
1 Climate control rear operating unit 176
2 Electronics compartment in the center con sole
115 V socket 145
3j Sets the fully reclined position 112
4V Selects the front passenger seat 109
5 s Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off
125
6w Switches the rear seat heating on/off 123
7 Adjusts the reclining rear seats electrically 111
8a Resets the standard seat adjustment settings
112
9 Memory function in the rear passenger com partment
131
A Storage box in the seat backrest
Refrigerator box 147
B Storage compartment in the rear armrest
C MBUX rear tablet bracket
D Cup holder
At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 21
22 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
1 B-pillar with:
QR code for accessing the rescue card 35
2 Safety vests 337
3; me button 309
G SOS button 309
4 Checking and refilling operating fluids 468
Starting assistance 348
5 Tow-starting or towing away 351
6 Flat tire 338
7 Hazard warning light system 156
8 Fuel filler flap with:
information label on fuel type 205
Information label for tire pressure 361
QR code for accessing the rescue card 35
9 Tow-starting or towing away 351
A First-aid kit 338
B TIREFIT kit 340
C Warning triangle 338
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 23
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Open Digital Operator's Manual The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Operator's Manual: R Quick start: find the first steps towards set
ting up your vehicle. R Tips: find information that prepares you for
certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle
functions. R Messages: receive additional information
about the messages in the driver display. R Language: select the language for the Digital
Operator's Manual.
You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
1 Menu 2 Search 3 Back 4 Contents section
Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Driver display: call up brief information as dis play messages in the instrument cluster MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for con tents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man ual is deactivated while driving. % With automatic content updates, you can
always keep the Digital Operator's Manual up to date. This function is country-depend ent.
24 Digital Operator's Manual
Protection of the environment
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi ronment. Please observe the following rec ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor
rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.
# Switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon ditioned components
MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo
nents and parts from MercedesBenz AG.
General notes 25
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Have aftermarket installation of acces sories carried out at a qualified special ist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 466) when ordering Mercedes- Benz GenuineParts.
Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
26 General notes
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Touch-sensitive controls In addition to conventional switches and but tons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensi tive controls. These are located in the following areas of your vehicle: R Roof and door control panel R Climate control R Steering wheel R MBUX multimedia system
The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by press ing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, for example. In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibra tion, or the surface structure changes on the
touch-sensitive user interface surface, for exam ple. You receive haptic feedback in the following sit uations, for example: R When pressing a button on the user interface
surface R When scrolling in a list or table R When reaching a new area on the user inter
face surface, e.g. a pop-up window
When handling touch-sensitive user interface surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating: R Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the
surfaces. R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture
and wet conditions. R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt.
Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element.
Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328
General notes 27
In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu ment wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard ous to health
In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures
To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and
maintenance work as well any required
28 General notes
repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts
Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec
tronic component parts or their soft ware.
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under side.
# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo nents
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or
suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and
General notes 29
the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or # If driving safety is impaired while con
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work shop.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology)
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem contain individual high-voltage compo nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.
If you modify component parts of these high- voltage components or touch damaged com ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to compo
nent parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts
of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of high-
voltage components after an accident.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo nents are marked with a high voltage label:
All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi cle components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
30 General notes
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno vation, Science and Economic Development Can adas RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."
Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) This equipment complies with FCC and IC radia tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm (in contact) between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating with any other antenna or transmitter. USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): This Device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules."
The name and address of the party responsible is: Continental Automotive Systems US Inc. 2400 Executive Hills Drive Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980 United States of America
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
General notes 31
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and condi tions for this matter.
Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos tics connection can lead to emissions monitor ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor rectly carry out the work required on your vehi cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and
conversions R Work on electronic components
32 General notes
R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ boost technology): work on high voltage components of the 48 V on- board electrical system
MercedesBenz recommends an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids MercedesBenz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi bility of medical aids malfunctioning,
MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec essary, contact us at one of the following addresses:
General notes 33
In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov
Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans port Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes- Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll- free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels
34 General notes
Limited Warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat
ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage.
QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage Data processing in the vehicle
Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi cle. Control units process data which, for exam ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment func tions. The following provides you with general informa tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what pur pose, can be found in the information directly
related to the functional characteristics in ques tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.
Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov
General notes 35
ernmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufac turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ ual cases and within the applicable legal frame work, authorized to read out data from the vehi cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,
longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas tened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature,
rain sensor or distance sensor
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the
vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle SmartKeys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components,
such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system
components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa
tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle
damage
In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.
If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac turer is subject to product liability. For this rea son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These
36 General notes
data can also be used to examine the custom er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.
Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services
These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par ticular, when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart
phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transfer red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/ night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Opera tor's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is made possible by the
General notes 37
vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func tions can be used via the wireless network con nection. This includes online services and appli cations/apps provided to you by the manufac turer or by other providers.
Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of serv ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con tractual agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.
Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per sonal data.
Data protection rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection
and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect
If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi media system or Mercedes me connect, addi tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
38 General notes
Event data recorders
USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were
operating R Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
General notes 39
Copyright Free and open source software
Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trade
marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen
tex Corporation. R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R Burmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microsoft and Windows Media are regis
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq
uity Digital Corporation. R Gracenote is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
40 General notes
Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos
sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Reduced restraint system protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint
system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys
Occupant safety 41
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci dent
How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal
impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron
tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,
frontal impact R Rear airbag: frontal impact R Belt airbag: frontal impact R Cushionbag: frontal impact
42 Occupant safety
R PRE-SAFE Impulse Side: side impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 53).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig gered or an airbag deployed.
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear
ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz
ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo rate, for example.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu
pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 105).
Occupant safety 43
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen
ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 133). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 65). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 61).
Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.
44 Occupant safety
# Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys tem.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage
Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the func tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices. # Before starting the journey, make sure
that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera tional and are unable to perform their inten ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
Occupant safety 45
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.
Information on the beltbag in the rear seat belt
The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a beltbag. When activated, the beltbag increases the pro tected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of a non-approved child restraint sys tem
In an accident, the beltbag may damage a non-approved child restraint system or a child restraint system which has not been approved for use in conjunction with the belt bag. # Therefore, always use LATCH or ISOFIX
to fasten a child seat equipped with an integrated restraint system.
# For vehicles equipped with the optional rear seat-belt airbags ("beltbag"), only
use a Mercedes-Benz approved booster seat with integrated backrest.
# Never use an airbag equipped seat belt to fasten a front- or rear-facing child seat or a non-approved booster seat.
# Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on approved child restraint systems.
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further. Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt buckles: the illuminated seat belt buckle makes fastening your seat belt easier in certain situa tions, for example, when ambient light condi tions are poor. % The illumination on the seat belt buckle does
not indicate that the seat belt buckle is func tioning correctly.
# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the cor responding seat.
# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet3 into the desired position.
# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet3 locks into position.
46 Occupant safety
% A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 43).
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem (/ page 47).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Releasing seat belts
# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger
The seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.
The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Occupant safety 47
Airbags Overview of airbags
Driver's/front passenger seat: 1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window curtain airbag 5 Side airbag
Rear seats: 4 Window curtain airbag 6 Side airbag 7 Rear airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym bolM indicates the installation location for cer tain airbags. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat
occupants R Rear airbag: head
Information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 70). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or
48 Occupant safety
forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.
Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 53).
* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Information on the rear airbag Always observe the information on the rear air bag, especially in the following situations: R A person is sitting on the outer rear seat. R You install a child restraint system on the
outer rear seat. R You stow objects behind the front seats.
Before beginning the journey, observe the infor mation on the rear airbag (/ page 56). Be aware of the status of the respective rear airbag depending on the situation both before and dur ing the journey (/ page 58).
Information on the cushionbag in the reclin ing rear seat The cushionbag offers additional occupant pro tection in the event of frontal impacts. When enabled, the cushionbag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant from slipping off the seat cushion. If you install a child restraint system on the reclining rear seat, always observe the additional notes (/ page 64).
Protective capacity of the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor rectly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function.
Occupant safety 49
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep
as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.
# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 105).
Vehicles with rear airbag: always observe the information on the rear airbag when the rear seat is occupied (/ page 56). The vehicle occupants should sit as far back from the airbags as possible and keep an equal distance to them. R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet
on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. Vehicles with rear airbag: always observe the information on the rear airbag when the rear seat is occupied (/ page 56). R If children are traveling in the vehicle,
observe the additional notes (/ page 61). R Always store and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Vehicles with rear airbag: also observe the information on the rear airbag (/ page 56). R There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation
50 Occupant safety
instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 48).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten ded. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
# Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.
Occupant safety 51
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi
tioned correctly (/ page 60). R Always comply with the child restraint sys
tem manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust
ment.
R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut off. # Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint system.
# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 43). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
52 Occupant safety
R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 53).
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.
Occupant safety 53
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may
deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger
airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa
bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con tinuously.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 70). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.
54 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward- facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle inte
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet
and the front passenger seat accord ingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 70). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled.
Occupant safety 55
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor
rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 70)
Information on the rear airbag
Points to remember when the rear seat is occupied The rear airbag offers the occupants on the outer rear seats additional occupant protection in the event of certain types frontal impacts.
When triggered, the rear airbag deploys between the rear seat occupant and the front seat. The rear airbag can help prevent the occupants on the rear seats from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, observe the following information: R Inform persons on the rear seats about the
rear airbag in the front seat. R A person sitting on the rear seat must adopt
the correct seat position and sit as far back from the rear airbag as possible. Adjust the front seats when necessary so that vehicle occupants are sitting as far back from the airbag as possible and at an equal distance to them. R Observe the notes on airbag protection
(/ page 49).
To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of the airbag, vehicle occupants on the outer rear seats must observe the following information in particular: R The occupants must always keep their feet
on the floor. Otherwise, feet and legs of occupants may be in the deployment area of the rear airbag. If an occupant's feet cannot reach the floor, they must adopt the correct seat position and let their legs hang down the front of the seat. R The feet or legs of the person on the rear
seat must not rest against the seat backrest of the front seat, for example. Otherwise, their feet and legs are in the deployment area of the rear airbag. This should be taken into consideration especially if you are travel ing with a child on the rear seat. If you are traveling with a child in the left or right rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific information: (/ page 69). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or
56 Occupant safety
forward-facing child restraint systems on the left and right rear seats. R Make sure that the covers for the rear air
bags are not damaged. R Observe the notes on limitations to the pro
tection provided by airbags (/ page 51).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to a dam aged rear airbag cover
If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. # Before starting a journey, make sure the
covers for the rear airbags are not dam aged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a dam aged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the multimedia system (/ page 58).
Objects behind the front seat Objects in the deployment area of the rear air bags may prevent the rear airbags from function ing correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects placed in front of the rear airbag cover
Objects in front of the rear airbag cover can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the rear airbag which is integrated into the front seat. The rear airbag can potentially deploy in an uncontrolled manner and can cause addi tional injury to the person on the front seat. # Always stow and secure objects cor
rectly.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 133).
Disabling/enabling the rear airbag If, after consideration of the notes and instruc tions in this Operator's Manual, you deem the additional occupant protection provided by the
rear airbag unnecessary, the rear airbag can be disabled. The rear airbags should be disabled in the follow ing situations in particular: R A rearward-facing child restraint system is
secured on the left or right rear seat. R The person in the rear seat, for example a
child, cannot sit in the correct seat position. Their feet and legs are potentially in the deployment area of the rear airbag. R Due to the position of the front seats, an
occupant's legs, for example, are in the deployment area of the rear airbag. R Objects are stored behind the front seat
which are in the deployment area of the rear airbags.
You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the multimedia system (/ page 58).
Occupant safety 57
Function of the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps
l Left rear seat k Right rear seat
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultane ously.
After the self-test, the status of the rear airbag for the left and right rear seat is displayed via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps: R ON is lit: the rear airbag may deploy during
an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are off: the rear airbag may
deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the rear airbag is disabled. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an acci dent.
If the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the rear airbag. The REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
Enabling/disabling the rear airbag via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Enable or disable the desired rear airbag
under Rear Airbags.
PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion)
PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
sliding sunroof.
58 Occupant safety
R Vehicles with memory function: move the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with memory function in the
rear passenger compartment: move the outer rear seats to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increase
the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi
media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is can
celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations: R When backing up
The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving
or R When entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Function of PRE-SAFE Impulse Side
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE- SAFE Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat
Occupant safety 59
side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.
If PRE-SAFE Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual(/ page 479) display message appears.
Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 314) R Switching off the engine
To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 188). Depending on the type and severity of the
accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. R Switching off the fuel supply R Unlocking the vehicle doors R Lowering the side windows R Displaying the emergency guide in the cen
tral display R Switching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post- collision brake can minimize the severity of a fur ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak ing the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic brak
ing R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force
Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle
% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 61).
Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
60 Occupant safety
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal ling a child restraint system.
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys tem is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observe standards for child restraint sys tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys tem (/ page 66). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
Occupant safety 61
height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur
er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys tem.
# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 66).
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 69).
62 Occupant safety
- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 71). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 70). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur rent situation (/ page 53).
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child
restraint systems that have been dam aged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
# Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket.
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Occupant safety 63
Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system
Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor
Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 68).
Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe: R If the rear seat is occupied, ensure, both
before and during the journey, that the status of the rear airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 58).
Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 53). R Observe the notes on automatic front
passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 51)
64 Occupant safety
Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 68).
Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord
ance with the traffic conditions.
# Activate the special seal belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
Installing a child restraint system: # When installing a child restraint system,
always observe the manufacturer's installa tion and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual.
# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.
# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor: # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.
# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.
Deactivating the special seat belt retractor: # Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
the seat belt outlet.
Occupant safety 65
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee ded.
Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys
tem together weigh more than the per missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.
# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat
ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.
O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow ing: O When using a baby car seat in weight
group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys tem.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respec tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight group 2 or 3.
66 Occupant safety
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi cle.
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped.
# Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Tilt the backrest of the reclining rear seat back slightly before the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is installed.
# Fold upholstered lining1 upwards. # Pull the tab on upholstered lining1
upwards and position it on the supporting surface. Upholstered lining1 will remain folded upwards.
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets 2 in the vehicle.
# To close, fold upholstered lining1 upwards. # Lift the tab from the support surface and
slide it back into the upholstery slot between
Occupant safety 67
the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the upholstery flap.
# Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Return the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright position. The reclining rear seat backrest must be in contact with the child restraint system.
Securing Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat after installing a child restraint system
Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats: The following may occur: R The Top Tether belt may sit either too
loose or too tight R The child restraint system may be loose,
incorrectly positioned or damaged and then not perform its intended protective function.
# Never adjust the seat after the child restraint system has been installed.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH- type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
# If necessary, slide head restraint1 upwards (/ page 118).
# Remove cover2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufactur er's installation instructions.
68 Occupant safety
# Guide Top Tether belt4 under head restraint1 between the two head restraint bars.
# Hook Top Tether hook5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage3 without twisting.
# Tension Top Tether belt4. In doing so, com ply with the child restraint system manufac turer's installation instructions.
# If necessary, slide head restraint1 down wards (/ page 118). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt4.
Vehicles with rear airbag
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the left and right rear seat
Sticker visible when the rear door is open
When installing a child restraint system, the rear airbag can be disabled.
If using a forward-facing child restraint sys tem with enabled rear airbag: make sure that the child's feet are not placed in front of the rear airbag cover or on the seat backrest. The child's legs can otherwise be thrown up if the rear air bag is deployed.
Enabling/disabling the rear airbag The rear airbag can be enabled or disabled via the multimedia display (/ page 58).
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat
When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that
Occupant safety 69
the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a weight category I forward- facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category 2 or 3. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 65). # Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet.
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
70 Occupant safety
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
Observe the specific instructions for the rear ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 71). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 53). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 70).
O Observe the child restraint system manufac turer's installation and operating instruc tions.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 65).
Occupant safety 71
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the back edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.
# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.
Child safety locks
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
72 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
# Press the lever in direction1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows
# To activate/deactivate: press button2. The rear side window can be opened or closed as follows: R Indicator lamp1 is lit: via the switch on
the driver's door
Occupant safety 73
R Indicator lamp1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door
When the child safety lock is activated, the con trols in the rear compartment are disabled for: R The rear side windows R The adjustment of the front passenger seat
from the rear compartment R The roller sunblinds:
- of the rear side windows - of the rear window - in the roof
Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches.
An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat
tended. # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier.
74 Occupant safety
SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields
# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.
SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Opens/closes the trunk lid
2 Unlocks (with embossed surface) 3 Locks 4 Indicator lamp 5 Panic alarm
% If indicator lamp4 does not light up after pressing the ors button, the bat tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 77). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Trunk lid
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti- theft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality.
Opening and closing 75
Indicator lamp of the vehicle locking system
Indicator lamp1 in the trim on the driver's side flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside. Indicator lamp1 remains off if the vehicle is locked from inside or while the vehicle is in motion.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.
# To activate: press button1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
# To deactivate: briefly press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit,
with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
# To switch between settings: press the ands buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
76 Opening and closing
driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the SmartKey functions
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Deactivate the SmartKey functions to protect your vehicle from unauthorized access. This can be useful when you park your vehicle on busy streets or in park ing spaces not in plain view, for example. You must reactivate the key functions to use KEY LESS-GO again. If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press thes button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the Smart Key.
% When the vehicle is started with the Smart Key in the marked space of the center con
sole, the SmartKey functions are automati cally activated (/ page 188).
Removing/inserting the emergency key
Removing the emergency key
# Press release button1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.
# Fully remove emergency key2.
Inserting the emergency key
# Insert emergency key2 at marking3 until it engages.
% You can use emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
Opening and closing 77
severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil
dren. # If the cover and/or cap of the battery
compartment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children.
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).
# Press emergency key2 into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until cover1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover1 closed.
78 Opening and closing
# Insert emergency key2 into the opening and lift up covering3 and remove it.
# Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery4 falls out of the Smart Key.
# Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
# Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities.
# Insert the front tabs of covering3 into the housing and then press on both sides to close it.
# Make sure that covering3 is completely closed.
# Insert the front tabs of cover1 into the housing and then press until it is completely closed.
# Insert the emergency key again (/ page 77).
Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot ing
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the battery check lamp (/ page 75).
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 77).
# Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 83). # Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.
You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified
specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Opening and closing 79
Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
# To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle1.
# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle.
# To open a rear door: pull the rear door han dle again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2.
The red indicator lamp on button2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.
% The buttons are also on the front passenger and rear doors.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO
Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
In the following cases, the door handles are extended: R When the vehicle is unlocked R When the vehicle SmartKey is detected R When a door is opened
80 Opening and closing
In the following cases, the door handles are retracted: R When the vehicle is locked R When pulling away R After waiting for a time
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door
R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the SmartKey functions in these situations.
or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a
minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.
Observe the following information: R Information on washing the vehicle in a car
wash (/ page 330)
R Notes on using a power washer (/ page 331)
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of door handle1.
% If the door handle is not extended, touch sensor surface2 to unlock.
# To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor surface3.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface3 for an extended period.
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 93).
Opening and closing 81
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva
ted. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
# Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 77).
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 75).
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 77).
# Use the replacement SmartKey. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 83). # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.
Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking Function % The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.
# Switch Automatic Door Lock on or off. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow-started or
pushed R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna
mometer
Power closing function
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically
Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. # Ensure that no body parts or objects
are in the closing area. # Automatic closing of the doors can be
canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.
If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.
82 Opening and closing
% If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or while pulling away, an automatic closing of the doors can be triggered.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key
Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the emergency key Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO # Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).
# Pull and hold the door handle. # To unlock: insert the emergency key into the
lock cylinder. # Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to
position1. # Remove the emergency key and release the
door handle.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).
# If the door handle is retracted: press the front area of door handle1. The door handle folds slightly outward.
# Pull and hold the door handle.
Opening and closing 83
# If the door handle is extended: slightly pull and hold the door handle.
# To unlock: insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
# Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to position1.
# Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.
Locking the doors
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening1 on the door lock.
# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.
# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Trunk Opening the trunk lid
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.
84 Opening and closing
* NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta cles above the vehicle
The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi
cient clearance above the trunk lid.
# Pull the trunk lid handle. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make
a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 88).
Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing
# Pull trunk lid remote operating switch1. # Press and hold theH button on the
SmartKey.
# If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid upwards.
If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
Closing the trunk lid
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Opening and closing 85
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Note on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detec ted in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked. This depends on the following conditions: R You have closed the trunk lid and the vehicle
was locked beforehand. R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle
is not detected outside the vehicle.
The trunk lid will then not be locked and will pop open again. Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# Before locking, ensure that at least one SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
# Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han dle recess and push it closed.
% If you lightly push the trunk lid closed, the power closing function will automatically pull the trunk lid into the lock.
Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid
Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop
the closing process: R Press theH button on the
SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating
switch on the driver's door.
R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.
# Pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close.
# If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The trunk lid will continue to close.
86 Opening and closing
# Press trunk lid remote operating switch1. # Press closing button1 on the trunk lid.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button2 on the trunk lid.
If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked.
# With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold theH button on the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehi cle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # With the trunk lid completely open, make a
kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 88).
Trunk lid automatic reversing function The trunk lid is equipped with automatic block age detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the auto matic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive ness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R towards the end of the closing procedure
Opening and closing 87
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the
closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the
following options: R Press theH button on the
SmartKey. R Press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button
on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 84) and closing (/ page 85) the trunk lid.
% A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is opening or closing.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door
R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the SmartKey functions in these situations.
or
88 Opening and closing
# Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.
When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.
1 Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros
thetic leg.
The trunk lid could be opened or closed uninten tionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi
cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are
pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over
the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 77) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.
Opening and closing 89
Switching separate trunk locking on and off
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing
Switching separate trunk locking on # Select Block Trunk Access. # Create a PIN. # Press OK to confirm the PIN. # Enter the PIN again and confirm it.
The trunk will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally.
% If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.
% You can open the trunk with the emergency key even while trunk lock is active. Separate trunk locking will remain active.
Switching separate trunk locking off # Select Block Trunk Access.
# Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted.
Resetting the PIN If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off separate trunk locking with the emergency key. # Select Block Trunk Access. # Confirm Forget PIN?. # Unlock the trunk within 3 minutes with the
emergency key. Separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted.
Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release
Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and
charged.
# Press emergency release button1 briefly.
Unlocking the trunk lid using the emergency key
# Take the emergency key out of the SmartKey (/ page 77).
# Insert the emergency key into the trunk lock as far as it will go.
90 Opening and closing
# Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise from position1 to position2.
# Turn the emergency key back to position1 and remove it.
% If you use the emergency key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm sys tem will be triggered.
Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate the Opening Height
Limiter.
This function prevents the trunk lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for example.
Side windows Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the but
ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended.
Opening and closing 91
# Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side win dows.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
1 Closes 2 Opens
The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence. # To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull theW button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, you can con tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. % Vehicles with electric roller sunblinds on
rear doors on the left and right: The but tons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds (/ page 100).
Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
92 Opening and closing
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin
gers. R During resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent some one from becoming trapped in these situa tions. # During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing area.
# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.
% If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.
% If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature
is operating, monitor the entire closing
Opening and closing 93
process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Press and hold thes button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release thes button.
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold thes button again.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 80).
Resolving problems with the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to reopen the side window.
A side window cannot be closed and you can not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the
window guide. # Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor
responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor
responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjust ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea ture. Possible cause: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
94 Opening and closing
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 75).
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 77).
Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During the opening and closing proc
ess, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof.
# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately.
or
# Touch the control panel during auto matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
# During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately.
or # Touch the control panel during auto
matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips.
Opening and closing 95
# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
* NOTE Damage to panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof luggage rack
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack. # Do not open the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage rack is installed.
The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind are operated using control panel1. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # To open: swipe backwards across control
panel1 and hold.
# To close: swipe forwards across control panel1 and hold.
# To raise or lower: press control panel1 briefly.
# To start automatic operation: swipe for wards or backwards across control panel1.
# To cancel automatic operation: press con trol panel1 again. The opening/closing process will be stop ped.
96 Opening and closing
Operating the rear roller sunblind from the front
# To open or close: press button1. # To stop: press button1 again.
If you stop the opening or closing process, the roller sunblind will first be closed again when the process is resumed.
Operating the rear roller sunblind from the rear passenger compartment
# To open/close manually: push or pull but ton1 to the point of resistance and hold it until the roller sunblind has reached the desired position.
# To open/close fully: push or pull button1 beyond the point of resistance and release it.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R towards the end of the closing procedure. R during resetting. R when you close the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic reversing.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Opening and closing 97
# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately.
or # Touch the control panel during auto
matic closing. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblinds If an obstacle obstructs a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblinds, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move ment.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin gers.
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately.
or # Touch the control panel during auto
matic closing. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.
Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered
slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for wards or backwards.
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again
If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi ately after it has been blocked or reset, the
98 Opening and closing
sliding sunroof closes with increased or max imum force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the con
trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto
matic closing. The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe
forwards across the control panel (/ page 95) and hold until the sliding sun roof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
The sliding sunroof or the front roller sun blind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun
blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Repeatedly swipe forwards across the con
trol panel (/ page 95) and hold until the sliding sunroof is completely closed.
# Press and hold the control panel for another second.
# Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed.
# Press and hold the control panel for another second.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
The rear roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the rear roller sunblind.
Resetting the rear roller sunblind
# Pull and hold button1 repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed.
# Pull button1 for another second.
Opening and closing 99
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the rear roller sunblind.
Roller sun blinds Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows
The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows.
1 Rear left side window/roller sunblind 2 Rear right side window/roller sunblind
# To close fully: pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed or is in the process of closing.
# To open fully: press the corresponding but ton.
Extending or retracting the rear window roller sunblind
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind
Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the
range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly
press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.
Extending or retracting from the driver's seat
* NOTE Damage caused by objects
Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal function. # Do not store objects on the rear shelf.
100 Opening and closing
# Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.
# Press button1. % Depending on the model, button1 is loca
ted on the door control panel on the driver's side.
Extending or retracting from the rear passenger compartment
* NOTE Damage caused by objects
Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal function. # Do not store objects on the rear shelf. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can
move freely.
# To extend: pull switch1. # To retract: press switch1.
When the child safety lock for the rear side win dows is activated, switch1 cannot be oper ated.
Opening and closing 101
Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicles battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the trunk lid is opened R when the hood is opened R when interior protection is triggered
(/ page 103) R when the tow-away alarm is triggered
(/ page 103)
The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa tions: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
102 Opening and closing
R after pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 188)
% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 315).
% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.
Deactivating the ATA # Press the,s orH button on the
SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart
Key in the marked space (/ page 188)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # With the SmartKey outside the vehicle, touch
the inner surface of the door handle.
Function of the tow-away alarm
% This function may not be available in all countries.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol lowing components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva ted: R After pressing the orH button on
the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 188)
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 213).
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
Function of the interior motion sensor
% This function may not be available in all countries.
Opening and closing 103
When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati cally after approximately ten seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid
The interior motion sensor is automatically deac tivated: R After pressing the orH button on
the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 188) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R Moving objects such as mascots in the vehi
cle interior R When a side window is open R When a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-
sor. The Interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
104 Opening and closing
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion R Your legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint
R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru
ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con
ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the center of your shoul der and across your hips in the pelvic area
Seats Adjusting the front seat electrically
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 105
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incor rectly adjusted head restraints
If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
106 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to exces sive strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage.
# Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in get ting in and out of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.
# When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.
Seats and stowing 107
1 Head restraint fore-and-aft position (vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint)
2 Head restraint height 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion inclination 5 Seat cushion length 6 Seat fore-and-aft position 7 Seat backrest inclination
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 129).
% The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.
% Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints: The fore-and-aft position of the head restraint will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest angle.
Adjusting the front passenger seat electri cally from the driver's seat
You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: R Seat adjustment R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Memory function
108 Seats and stowing
# To select the front passenger seat: press button1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door control panel.
Adjusting the front passenger seat electri cally from the rear passenger compartment
Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Seat height 5 Seat fore-and-aft position
Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position 3 Head restraint height 4 Seat backrest inclination 5 Seat height 6 Seat fore-and-aft position
Seats and stowing 109
Vehicles with seat for chauffeur mode and long wheelbase 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position 3 Head restraint height 4 Seat backrest inclination 5 Seat height 6 Front passenger seat footrest 7 Seat fore-and-aft position
The footrest can be adjusted only when one of the following conditions has been fulfilled: R Depending on the equipment, the front
passenger seat is in one of the following positions: - Vehicles without leg rest: the front
passenger seat has moved into a random position.
- Vehicles with leg rest: the front passenger seat has been moved fully forward.
R The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.
# Adjust the rear seat (/ page 110). # Adjust the reclining rear seat (/ page 111). # To select the front passenger seat: press
button1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door operating unit in the rear passenger compartment.
% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 73).
Adjusting the rear seats electrically
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed back on the switch while pressing the switch.
110 Seats and stowing
Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. You can electrically adjust only the outer seats in the rear passenger compartment.
1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat)
2 Head restraint height
3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and
length
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 131).
Adjusting the reclining rear seats electrically
The reclining rear seat is available in long-wheel base vehicles equipped with "Executive seats". In vehicles without a reclining rear seat, the but ton for setting the angle and fore-and-aft posi tion of the leg rest has no function. The reclining rear seat is on the front passenger side.
1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat)
2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and
length 5 Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest 6 Angle of the leg rest
Seats and stowing 111
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 131).
% The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it.
% Vehicles with a long wheelbase and the Chauffeur/Rear Seat Memory Package also have a footrest. This is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest (/ page 115).
Setting the fully reclined position
# To set the fully reclined position: press button1. R The rear seat will move into the fully
reclined position. R The front passenger seat will move into
the position for chauffeur mode.
R The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat. R If available, the leg rest will rise.
# To restore the standard seat settings: press button1.
% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 73).
112 Seats and stowing
% The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it.
Chauffeur mode
Information on chauffeur mode
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incor rectly adjusted head restraints
If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem. # Do not store any objects under the co-
driver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.
* NOTE Damage to objects in the luggage net of the front passenger footwell when adjusting the front passenger seat to the chauffeur position
Objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell can become damaged when the front passenger seat is adjusted to the chauffeur position. # Remove the objects from the luggage
net.
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make
sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. Observe the following: R Adjust the front passenger seat for chauffeur
mode before the journey
For chauffeur mode, the following settings are made for the front passenger seat: R The seat is moved forwards R The backrest is tilted forwards R The head restraint is folded forwards
Seats and stowing 113
The front passenger seat will automatically move from the chauffeur position back into the normal position in the following situations: R The front passenger seat is adjusted using
the buttons in the door operating unit on the front passenger side R The front passenger seat belt is fastened R An occupant is detected on the front
passenger seat R The front passenger seat backrest is adjus
ted rearwards. R The front passenger seat is moved in the
fore-and-aft direction out of the chauffeur area
Positioning the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode
Requirements: R The front passenger seat is not occupied. R The front passenger seat belt is not inserted
in the buckle.
1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Sets the seat fore-and-aft position
# To select the front passenger seat: press button1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
114 Seats and stowing
Setting the chauffeur position # Push button2 forwards and hold it in this
position. The front passenger seat will move forward and stop at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.
# Release button2. # Push button2 forward and hold it again
until the front passenger seat is in the posi tion for chauffeur mode. The front passenger seat head restraint will fold forwards. The front passenger seat will move forward.
% If the front passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode, the position for chauffeur mode will be set immediately.
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 131).
% You can use the rear passenger compart ment child safety lock to disable this func tion (/ page 73).
Using the footrest on the front passenger seat
Requirements: R Depending on the equipment, the front
passenger seat is in one of the following positions: - Vehicles without leg rest: the front
passenger seat has moved into a random position.
- Vehicles with leg rest: the front passenger seat has been moved fully forward.
R The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.
Using the footrest The footrest is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest.
# Push button1 towards the rear. The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat.
# Push the extended footrest upwards with your foot until it releases.
# Allow the footrest to lower. The footrest will position itself on the floor.
Seats and stowing 115
Storing the footrest
# Push the footrest upwards with your foot until it engages.
# Push button1 forwards. The footrest will retract underneath the front passenger seat.
Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position (chauffeur mode)
# To select the front passenger seat: press button1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Setting the normal position # Push button3 towards the rear and hold it
in this position. The front passenger seat will move to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.
116 Seats and stowing
The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position. The front passenger seat will then move fur ther towards the rear.
or # Briefly push button2 towards the rear.
The front passenger seat will move automati cally to the threshold of the area for chauf feur mode. The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position.
% You can also set the normal position from the front passenger seat. To do so, press any button on the door operating unit on the front passenger side.
# Call up the settings with the memory func tion (/ page 131).
% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 73).
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints mechanically
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incor rectly adjusted head restraints
If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
Seats and stowing 117
# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
# To move backwards: press release knob1 and push the head restraint backwards.
Attaching and removing the additional cush ion of the front-seat luxury head restraint
# Position head restraint2 as far forwards as possible.
# To attach the additional cushion: open Vel cro strip4 on the back of additional cush ion1.
# Guide Velcro strip4 between head restraint 2 and strip3.
# Close Velcro strip4. # Change the position of the additional
cushion: move additional cushion1 up or down.
# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip4 of additional cushion1.
# Remove additional cushion1.
Lowering the rear seat head restraints elec trically from the front compartment Multimedia system: 4 5 5y
# Press.
Adjusting the outer rear seat head restraints manually
# To raise: pull the head restraint upwards and let it engage.
# To lower: press release knob1 in the direc tion of the arrow.
# Push the head restraint down and let it engage.
118 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of the rear seats manually
# To adjust the angle of the head restraint: pull or push the head restraint in the direc tion of arrow1.
Attaching and removing the additional cush ion of the head restraint in the rear passenger compartment (individual seats)
# Position head restraint2 as far forwards as possible.
# To attach the additional cushion: open Vel cro strip4 on the back of additional cush ion1.
# Guide Velcro strip4 between head restraint 2 and strip3.
# Close Velcro strip4. # To change the position of the additional
cushion: move additional cushion1 up or down.
# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip4 of additional cushion1.
# Remove additional cushion1.
Attaching heated additional cushion In vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints, you can heat the additional cushion. # Attach the additional cushion to the head
restraint as described. # Move the head restraint to the very top.
Seats and stowing 119
# Push press-studs2 on the additional strip into counterpieces1 on the head restraint.
# Move the head restraint to the desired height.
# To switch neck heating from the addi tional cushion on/off: make sure that press-studs2 on the additional strip are correctly pushed into counterpieces1 on the head restraint.
# Ensure that the "Couple neck heat to seat heating" function is active (/ page 121).
# Activate or deactivate the seat heating (/ page 123).
Folding the center head restraint into posi tion and folding it back manually
# To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages.
# To fold back: press button1. # Fold down the head restraint completely.
The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position.
120 Seats and stowing
Configuring the seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat
Adjusting the air cushions. # On the corresponding menu, adjust the air
cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side Bol- sters.
Setting the seat heating balance # Select Heating Settings. # Select Seat Heating Balance. # Adjust the heat distribution for the desired
seat. % The seat heating balance can be set in the
Seat Climate Control menu in the rear passenger compartment.
Coupling neck heat to seat heating # Select Additional Neck Warmer.
# Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. If the function is active, the neck heat of the additional cushion has been coupled to the seat heating.
Setting automatic seat adjustment
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of
driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move ment.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen
tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a
seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop ped.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Automatic Seat Positioning
Adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm
or ft/in.
Seats and stowing 121
# Set the size using the scale. # Select Start Positioning.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set.
% If the driver's seat and steering wheel posi tion calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually changed at any time via the control buttons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this func tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.
% You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect pro files, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about syn chronizing user profiles .
Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat)
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Dynamic Multicontour Seat.
With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjus ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle. # Select the desired setting.
Overview of massage programs
R Hot Relaxing Back: Based on hot stone mas sage, the program combines heat and mas sage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. R Hot Relaxing Shoulders Combination of heat
and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.
R Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves. R Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. R Wave Massage Regenerating massage via
massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. R Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing Massage with
upward-moving massage waves. Can pro mote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. R Workout, Backrest and Workout, Cushion
These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles. R Deep Waves: Wave-like movements in the
cushion can promote blood flow and meta bolic processes in the lower back and legs. R Deep Workout: Connect the Workout, Back-
rest to the Workout, Cushion. The vibrating massage in the cushion intensifies the effec
122 Seats and stowing
tiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the seat area and legs. R Calf Massage (rear passenger compartment):
calf massage using vibration. Can support metabolic processes and the reverse flow of blood. R Wave Massage (rear passenger compart
ment): Combines the vibration of the calf massage with the Classic Massage from the backrest in the rear passenger compartment.
Selecting the massage program for the front seats
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 122). # Start the program for the desired seat;. # To set the massage intensity: switch Inten-
sive on or off .
% For the rear seats, the massage program can be selected on the following devices (if avail able): R On the rear displays R On the MBUX rear tablet
The selection is made in the same way as on the rear displays for the rear seats on the second row of seats.
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Reset. # Select for the desired seat.
Switching the seat heating on/off
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limi ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over heating may occur due to objects or docu ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu
ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.
Seats and stowing 123
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8,
10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.
% If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active.
% You can set the distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system (/ page 124).
% Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can adjust the heating of the center con sole and door armrests using the multimedia system (/ page 124).
Setting the panel heating
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr ests, the center panels of the doors and the cen ter console can be heated.
124 Seats and stowing
# Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.
% If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat
ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
Seats and stowing 125
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.
1 To move up 2 To move back 3 To move down 4 To move forward
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 129).
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
# Push the switch into position1 or2. If indicator lamp3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.
126 Seats and stowing
When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.
Coupling the steering wheel heater to the seat heating
Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings # Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating.
The steering wheel heater will be coupled to the seat heating.
When the function has been activated, the steer ing wheel heater is automatically activated and deactivated when you switch the switch the seat heating on and off.
Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc
ess is complete before pulling away.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in
the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. # Move the adjustment lever of the steer
ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
# If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat, press the seat adjust ment switches. The adjustment process is stopped.
You can stop the adjustment process by press ing one of the memory function position switches.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature
Children could become trapped if they acti vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on (/ page 121).
Seats and stowing 127
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv er's seat will move back in the following situa tions: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's
door open R You open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off
% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.
The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the ignition
on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door with the ignition
switched on
The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off.
R You call up the seat settings via the memory function. R you save the seat settings via the memory
function.
If you press one of the memory function memory position switches, the adjustment process will be stopped.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Requirements: R The automatic seat adjustment has been
activated (/ page 121).
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort 5 Easy Entry And Exit Feature # Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering
Wheel Only or Off. % If you are using an individual user profile,
this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically .
Memory function Function of the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station ary.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the
memory function, ensure that no body
128 Seats and stowing
parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel.
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust ment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the igni tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.
You can save the following settings for the front seat: R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and
contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Vehicles with an active multicontour
seat: - Side bolsters of the seat backrest - Shoulder of the seat backrest - Contour of the seat backrest - Dynamic function level R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec
tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest R Driver's side: steering wheel position and
position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides R Head-up Display (depending on vehicle
equipment)
Operating the memory function
Storing
# Set the seat, the steering wheel, the Head-up Display and the outside mirror to the desired position.
# Press theV button and then release it.
Seats and stowing 129
# Press one of the preset position buttons 4,T orU within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.
# To call up: press the preset position button 4,T orU. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, Head-up Display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically.
% Driver's seat: to call up a stored position while driving, you must press and hold the preset position button.
Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Function of the memory function in the rear passenger compartment
Operating the rear seat Rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear compartment.
You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint R Vehicles with active multicontour seats:
The seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec
tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest
Operating the front passenger seat and rear seat Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear compartment. You can save the following settings for the front passenger seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
You can save the following settings for the rear seat: R Position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint R Vehicles with active multicontour seats:
The seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec
tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest
The following settings are also stored to a mem ory position, if the indicator lamp in thev button lights up: R Position of the footrest of the front
passenger seat, if available R Position of the screen, if available
Using the preset position buttons, you always store the current setting of each seat.
130 Seats and stowing
Operating the rear seat via the memory func tion in the rear passenger compartment
Storing
# Press button1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.
# Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 110).
Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat
# Press theV button and then release it. # Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press
one of the preset position buttons4, T orU within three seconds. The settings are stored.
# Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of the preset position buttons4 or T within three seconds. The settings are stored.
% Vehicles with reclining rear seat: You can not store any settings on thej anda buttons for adjusting the reclined and stand ard positions.
Calling up # Press button1.
The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.
# Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press preset position button4,T orU. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the rear seat is automatically moved into the stored position.
# Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of preset position buttons4 orT. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the rear seat is automatically moved into the stored position.
Seats and stowing 131
Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear compartment
Storing
# Press button1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.
# Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 110).
# Press button1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 105).
# Ensure that the indicator lamp in button1 lights up.
Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat
# Press theV button and then release it. # Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press
one of the preset position buttons4, T orU within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected pre set position.
132 Seats and stowing
# Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of the preset position buttons4 or T within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected pre set position.
% Vehicles with reclining rear seat: You can not store any settings on thej anda buttons for adjusting the reclined and stand ard positions.
Calling up # Press button1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
# Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press one of preset position buttons4,T or U. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat and rear seat are moved automatically into the stored position.
# Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press one of preset position buttons4 orT. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat and rear seat are moved automatically into the stored position.
% The preset positions in the area for chauffeur mode can only be set when the conditions for chauffeur mode are fulfilled (/ page 113).
% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function (/ page 73).
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid.
# Never drive with the trunk lid open.
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on protection provided by the airbag (/ page 49). Vehicles with rear airbag: Also observe the notes on the rear airbag (/ page 56).
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
Seats and stowing 133
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.
Observe the notes on the cup holders. Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 51).
* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the
rear seat armrest.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi
cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.
134 Seats and stowing
# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.
* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart ment under the ashtray due to intense heat
The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully
engaged.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible. R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks.
Distribute the load on the parcel net hooks evenly.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front storage compartments
Seats and stowing 135
1 Storage spaces in the doors 2 Storage and telephone compartment
beneath the armrest with a charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones, mul timedia and USB ports as well as storage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Storage compartment in the front center console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones
4 Storage compartment in front of the central display of the multimedia system
5 Glove box
% The rubber mat in the storage compartment in front center console3 can be removed for cleaning with clear, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 334).
Folding the folding table out or in
& WARNING Risk of injury from an open folding table
Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding table and injure themselves. # Close the folding table before each jour
ney.
* NOTE Damage to the folding tables when moving the seats back
Open folding tables may be damaged when the seats are moved back. # Make sure that the folding tables are
folded in when moving the front seats back.
* NOTE Damage to objects when the fold ing tables are expanded or collapsed
Objects such as tablets and displays can be damaged when the folding tables are expan ded or collapsed. # Make sure that the folding tables are
expanded and collapsed properly.
Folding out
# Opening the storage compartment1 in the center console of the rear passenger com partment
136 Seats and stowing
# Pull folding table2 up and forwards by han dle recess3 and swing it outwards.
# Fold the table panels apart. % The table panels can be rotated forwards or
backwards to bring them into a comfortable position for the vehicle occupants in the rear passenger compartment.
# To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table.
Removing the handset from the rear storage compartment
Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats
# Fold down the rear armrest. # Open the storage compartment in the rear
armrest . # Tap handset1.
Handset1 will rise. # Remove handset1.
Vehicles with individual rear seats
# Open the storage box in the rear-compart ment backrest.
# Press button1. # Remove the handset.
Overview of the parcel net hooks
Observe the following notes: R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks. R Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load. These are intended only as anti-slip pro tection for light loads. R Do not route tie downs across sharp edges
or corners. R Pad sharp edges for protection.
Depending on the equipment installed, the trunk contains up to four parcel net hooks.
Seats and stowing 137
1 Parcel net hooks
Opening the through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment
Requirements: R The loading flap is unlocked (/ page 139).
Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats
# Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: Fold down the rear armrest.
# Pull handle1 and fold down cover2. The storage box in the rear-compartment backrest will be opened.
138 Seats and stowing
Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats
# Slide release catch2 in the handle recess of loading flap1 upwards. Loading flap1 will be unlocked.
# Push loading flap1 with release catch2 up as far back as possible until the flap locks in the highest position. The through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment will be opened.
If the through-loading feature is to be used as a storage compartment again: # Fold down loading flap1 and lock it in the
trunk (/ page 139).
Locking the through-loading feature in the trunk
Requirements: R The refrigerator box is removed.
Seats and stowing 139
# Slide the release catch on loading flap1 in the trunk to the right. The loading flap is locked.
Using the bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks. # Pull bag hook2 down by tab1. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 133).
EASY-PACK trunk box
Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK trunk box to any position
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the floor
Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box and objects may be thrown upwards. # Ensure that your hands are not in the
range of movement of the floor. # If someone becomes trapped, carefully
push the center of the floor downward. # Remove all objects from the floor
before raising it.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK trunk box in
Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the trunk box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so.
140 Seats and stowing
# Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the extended EASY- PACK trunk box
The EASY-PACK trunk box may be damaged when it is extended. # Do not place any objects on or press
down on the EASY-PACK trunk box frame.
# Do not close the trunk lid when the EASY-PACK trunk box is extended.
* NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK trunk box by objects
Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, frag ile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and be thrown out. # Do not transport objects that are sharp-
edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
# Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the trunk.
# Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
# Do not use the EASY-PACK trunk box when the rear seats are folded for wards.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the trunk floor when the load reaches approximately 11 lbs (5 kg).
# To remove: pull handle2 on the box. # To increase the load capacity: push the
center of floor1 downwards to the desired position and box size.
# To reduce the load capacity: press button 3.
# To store: push the box in completely using handle2 until it locks in place.
Seats and stowing 141
% Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY- PACK trunk box (/ page 334).
Installing and removing the EASY-PACK trunk box
Installing
# Turn rotating catches6 outward. # Insert retainers3 of box1 into holes2. # Raise box1 in the direction of the arrow
and press hooks5 into the anchorages of rear shelf4.
# Turn rotating catches6 inward.
Removing
# Turn rotating catches6 outward. # Lower box1 in the direction of the arrow
and pull it out of the anchorages on the rear shelf.
# Pull box1 back out of the openings in the direction of the arrow.
142 Seats and stowing
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from non- approved roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug gage racks that have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. # Only use roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof luggage rack is installed, the trunk lid can be fully opened.
# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
* NOTE Damage to panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof luggage rack
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack. # Do not open the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage rack is installed.
* NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects.
# Carefully fold covers1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.
Seats and stowing 143
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers1.
# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
Cup holder Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off
When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. For this rea son, you must not reach into the cup holder insert. When placing glasses in the temperature-con trolled cup holder, do not close the cover of the storage compartment in the rear center console because the glasses may tip over.
# To switch on: press button2 until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up.
# To switch off: press button2 until the indi cator lamp on the button goes out.
% Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the temperature- controlled cup holder1 only with a soft cloth.
Sockets Using the 12 V socket
Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the front passenger footwell R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri
cally adjustable outer seats: in the electron ics compartment of the rear center console R On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the
storage compartment of the rear center con sole R In the trunk
144 Seats and stowing
Example: 12 V socket in the rear center con sole
# Fold up socket cap1. # Insert the plug of the device.
If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compart ment open.
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam aged connecting cables or sockets
You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry
and free of damage. # When the ignition is switched off, make
sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power
socket checked or replaced at a quali fied specialized workshop if it is dam aged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock in partic ular: R If you reach into the socket. R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
# Do not reach into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Requirements: R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
% Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts (1.3 A) can be connected.
Seats and stowing 145
Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats in the rear passenger com partment
Vehicles with individual rear seats
# Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable outer seats: Open the electronics compartment in the rear center console.
# Vehicles with individual rear seats: Open the storage compartment in the rear center console.
# Open flap3. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V
socket2. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp1 lights up.
USB port in the rear passenger compartment
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment: R On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the
storage compartment of the rear passenger compartment center console . R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri
cally adjustable outer rear seats: in the elec tronics compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console . R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri
cally adjustable outer rear seats: in the stor age compartment in the rear armrest .
% These USB ports in the rear passenger com partment can be used to charge a mobile end device.
146 Seats and stowing
You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charg ing cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the ignition is switched on.
Refrigerator box Using the refrigerator box
& WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered vent grille on the refrigerator box
If you cover the vent grille for the refrigerator box, it may overheat. # Always make sure that the vent grille is
not covered.
The vent grille for the refrigerator box is in the trunk. The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg). The upper compartment of the refrigerator box can accommodate, for example, plastic bottles with a maximum capacity of 17 fl. oz. (0.5 liters)
and cans with a capacity of up to 11 fl. oz. (0.33 liters) If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period, you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time. The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capa city or switch off in the following cases: R Too many electrical consumers are turned
on. R The starter battery is not sufficiently
charged.
If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automati cally switch back on as soon as there is suffi cient voltage.
Example: vehicles with individual rear seats
# Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear armrest.
# Pull handle1 on the storage box and fold down cover2 of the storage box.
Seats and stowing 147
Example: vehicles with individual rear seats
# To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box 1 and fold down the cover of the refrigera tor box.
# To switch on: press button2 repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up.
# To switch off: press button2 repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out.
Removing or installing the refrigerator box
Installing
# Remove cover cap1.
# Open loading flap2 in the rear passenger compartment until the loading flap locks in the highest position (/ page 138).
# Pull upwards and hold handle7. The connection to refrigerator box4 is unlocked.
148 Seats and stowing
# Slide the refrigerator box with handle7 up into the open through-loading feature. Connection4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box3 are inserted into sockets 5 and6 of the through-loading feature.
# Once the refrigerator box has been connec ted in the vehicle, push down handle7. The refrigerator box is locked.
Removing # Pull up and hold handle7. # Pull the refrigerator box with handle7 up
out of sockets5 and6 of the though-load ing compartment. Connection4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box3 are separated from sock ets5 and6 of the through-loading fea ture.
Opening and closing the stowage compart ment of the refrigerator box in the trunk
# To open: pull the stowage compartment in refrigerator box1 out by the handle back wards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment1 is open.
# To close: slide the stowage compartment in refrigerator box1 forwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment1 is closed.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can
not be thrown around in such situa tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
Seats and stowing 149
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not
place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage
devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart ment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
Always observe the notes for persons with elec tronic medical aids (/ page 33).
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec
tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni tion is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. R To ensure more efficient charging and con
nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces sary for wireless charging are an exception.
150 Seats and stowing
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front
Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com/
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehi cle has the following options for wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the cockpit: R In the front storage compartment R In the storage compartment of the cockpit
armrest
Example: wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the front storage compartment
# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen ter of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front storage compartment: when a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc tions during the mobile phone's charging proc ess are shown in the multimedia system display. Wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the center console below the armrest: the mobile phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit
up. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indi cator lamp flashing three times. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment
Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com/
Seats and stowing 151
Example: vehicles with individual rear seats
# Open the storage compartment in the rear center console.
# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen ter of mat1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc tions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 133).
Installing and removing the floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Installing floor mats
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits.
# Press studs1 onto holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.
152 Seats and stowing
Removing floor mats # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
pull the floor mat off holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.
Seats and stowing 153
Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch
Operating light switches
1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog lamp on or off
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele vant legal stipulations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand ing lamps or parking lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
154 Light and visibility
The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 164).
Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi ent light.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or off
Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi
tion.
# Press the R button.
Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the lights
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left
# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.
Light and visibility 155
Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or
position. # Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.
Switching off high beam # Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3.
High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow3.
Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the
driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand
but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
# Press button1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if: R The airbag has been deployed.
156 Light and visibility
Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIG ITAL LIGHT
Intelligent Light System function In this system, the headlamps adapt to the driv ing and weather situation. It also provides exten ded functions for improved illumination of the road. % The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 157) R Cornering light (/ page 157) R Highway mode (/ page 158) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 158) R Bad weather light (/ page 158) R City lighting (/ page 158) R Topographical compensation (vehicles with
DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 158)
The system is active only when it is dark.
Active headlamps function
Functions of the active headlamps: R The headlamps follow the steering move
ments. R Relevant areas are better illuminated during
a journey.
The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.
Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and
43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned
Light and visibility 157
Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersection.
Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and bright ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil ity.
The function is active if a freeway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed
R The multifunction camera R Or the navigation system
The function is not active in the following cases: R At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h)
Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces reflec tions and improves the illumination of the edge of the road.
The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and
when the rear fog light is switched on.
The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R At speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h) after
activation. R When the rear fog light is switched off.
Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result.
The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of road sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas
Function of the topographical compensation Based on map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains vir
158 Light and visibility
tually constant when you are driving on uphill or downhill gradients. % The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Assistance functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. % The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country. The system is active in the following cases: R The light switch is in the position. R The high beam is switched on.
% If you activate the Head-up Display with aug mented reality, the projections can be deac tivated depending on the situation.
% Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When a border is crossed, the vehi
cle will automatically adapt to the valid requirements.
Spotlight
The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps at detected persons within the lane markings in four short bursts. The driver is made aware of the position of oncoming pedestrians by a projected symbol. The function is active under the following condi tions: R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R The system detects a lane marking.
Warnings
If Traffic Sign Assist detects a corresponding sit uation, a triangle will be projected onto the road in the following situations at speeds of at least 30 km/h: R You are driving in the opposite direction to
the permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a freeway access road. R You are driving towards a stop sign without
reducing your speed. R You are driving towards a red traffic light
without reducing your speed.
Light and visibility 159
Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 241).
Notes
If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows: R A corresponding symbol will be projected
onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone. R When you drive through a roadworks zone,
guide lines will be projected onto the road that roughly match the width of the vehicle. The guide lines will be suppressed for a while on tight bends.
Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 241).
Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 MULTIBEAM LED # Switch Dynamic Low Beam on or off.
% In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.
Activating or deactivating enhanced assis tance functions % The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country. # Select Supporting Projections. # Activate or deactivate the desired projection. # Activate or deactivate Projection when open-
ing/closing. If the locator lighting or the exterior switch- off delay time is activated, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or locked.
% More information on locator lighting (/ page 164) More information on the exterior switch-off delay time (/ page 164)
160 Light and visibility
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically
switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically.
Light and visibility 161
The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina
tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.
Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina
tion switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada)
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recog nize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf fic conditions.
162 Light and visibility
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with
DIGITAL LIGHT)
ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will
be switched off automatically.
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): R If no other road users are detected on a
straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto matically.
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada)
Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina
tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.
Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina
tion switch.
Light and visibility 163
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 MULTIBEAM LED # Switch the daytime running lamps on/off. % In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps,
the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off in the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time
Requirements: R The light switch is in the position.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 External Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time.
When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.
Activating/deactivating the locator lighting
Requirements: R The light switch is in the position.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting # Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting.
When the function is activated, the exterior light ing will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched off and automatic driving lights are activated.
Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
1c Switches the front interior lighting on/off
2u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
3| Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off
# To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp4 or5.
164 Light and visibility
Control panel inside the grab handle (rear passenger compartment)
1p Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle
2u Rear interior lighting
# To switch reading lamps on: press button 1. The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up.
# To switch reading lamps off: press button 1 once or twice. After pressing it once, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out. After pressing it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.
# To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press button2. The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting
Setting the color # Select Color. # Select Monochrome or Multi-color. # Set the desired color or color combination.
Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. % Depending on the ambient light, the ambient
lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes.
Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Switch off Link Zones .
The Direct, Indirect and Accent zones can be set separately.
% The Light band zone can also be set for vehi cles with active ambient lighting.
Activating effects
& WARNING Risk of an accident despite activated effects of ambient lighting and active ambient lighting
To use the Warning Assistance effects, the respective functions must be activated in the driver assist menu.
Light and visibility 165
# Make sure that the functions and assists are switched on.
% The exit warning system is only an aid. Further notes on driving systems and your responsibility: (/ page 215)
# Select Effects. # Activate the desired effect. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, differ
ent effects are available: Operating feedback effects: R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera
ture setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. R Voice Assistant: For vehicles with active
ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visu ally animated.
Warning assistance effects: R Warning When Exiting: If an object is detec
ted in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red.
Further information on the exit warning (/ page 247). R Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a
warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist: (/ page 250). R Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active
Brake Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the center of the dashboard will flash bright red. Further information on Active Brake Assist (/ page 236). R Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with
active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist. Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 247).
Greeting R When you get into the vehicle, a special color
animation will play.
Multi-color Animation R The chosen color combination will change at
predefined intervals.
% In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played.
% The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the symbol. Depending on the equipment, different operating feedback and warning assistance effects are available.
% If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness.
166 Light and visibility
Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch Interior Lighting Delay on or off.
When this function is active, the interior light ing will light up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.
Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off
1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Automatic wiping, normal 3 Automatic wiping, frequent
4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast
# Turn the combination switch to the corre sponding position1 -5.
# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow1. R Single wipe R Wiping with washer fluid
Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in position2 or3 , the windshield washing proc ess is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windshield unless the Check Washer Fluid message is being displayed.
Cleaning the windshield intensively For heavy soiling, you can clean the windshield intensively from an outside temperature of 41F (5C). # In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination
switch to position1,2 or3.
Light and visibility 167
# Press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow1 and hold it for approximately two seconds. The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position and washer fluid will be distrib uted on the windshield. After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper arms will move back again and wipe the windshield several times. Intensive cleaning has now finished.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again
immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold
the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 167). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.
Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind
shield.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 as far as it will go.
# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow4.
168 Light and visibility
Installing the wiper blades
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1.
# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor rectly.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind shield.
# Switch on the ignition. # Press the button on the combination
switch. The wiper arms will return to the original position.
# Switch the ignition off.
Maintenance display
# Remove protective film1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly instal led wiper blades.
When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.
Light and visibility 169
% The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch off the ignition. # Within around 15 seconds, press the
button on the combination switch (/ page 167). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.
Removing the wiper blades
# To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly in one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow1 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.
# To remove the wiper blade: press release knob2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow3 and remove.
Installing the wiper blades
# Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 until release knob2 engages.
170 Light and visibility
# Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow3 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again.
# Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul
der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
Adjusting the outside mirrors
# Use button2 or4 to select the desired mirror.
% In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via a natural head movement to the left or right (/ page 288).
Light and visibility 171
# Use button1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror.
Folding the outside mirrors in/out # Briefly press button3. % If the battery has been disconnected or has
discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button3. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.
Engaging the outside mirrors If an outside mirror has been forcibly disen gaged, proceed as follows. # Press and hold button3.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro
lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi tion function
The parking position makes parking easier.
172 Light and visibility
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 173). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans
mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side.
Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button2.
# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button1.
Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button2. # Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Switch Automatic Mirror Folding on or off.
Light and visibility 173
Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield
Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys tems, can be mounted only on areas1 of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves1 are best visi ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with: R Windshield heating R Infrared reflective windshield
Infrared-reflective windshield function The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte rior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.
174 Light and visibility
Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control
An interior air filter in combination with the pre filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control 1 s Increases the temperature
20 Switches the synchronization function on/off (/ page 178)
3
Switches climate control on/off (/ page 176)
4 Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 177)
5 Defrosts the windshield 6 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/ page 178) 7 Switches the rear window heater
on/off 8 J Increases the airflow or switches on
climate control (/ page 176) 9 r Reduces the temperature A Sets climate control to automatic
mode, right (/ page 177) B Calls up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 177) C Sets climate control to automatic
mode, left (/ page 177) D I Reduces the airflow or switches off cli
mate control(/ page 176)
Climate control 175
Overview of the rear operating unit
Example: USA 1 Sets air distribution to the center and side
air vents in the rear passenger compart ment, left
2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left
3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com partment, left, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 177)
4 Switches climate control on/off (/ page 177) Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 179)
5 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com partment, right, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 177)
6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right
7 Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compart ment, right
8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right
9 Sets the air distribution to the rear passenger compartment footwell vents, right
A Synchronization is activated (/ page 178) B Sets the air distribution to the rear
passenger compartment footwell vents, left C Sets rear climate control to automatic mode,
left
The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit, the multi media system (/ page 178) or the MBUX rear tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment.
Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off
Switching on climate control # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher viaJ
on the climate bar on the central display or # Press,s,r or.
Switching off climate control # Set the airflow to level 0 viaI on the cli
mate bar on the central display or #
Press . If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.
176 Climate control
Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit
# To switch on: press button4. or # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using but
tons3 and5. or # Press buttons2,6,8 orC. # To switch off: press button4. or # Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons3
and5. % If rear climate control is switched off via but
ton4, OFF will be shown on the rear dis play.
Calling up the air conditioning menu
The air conditioning menu can be called up via the air conditioning line. The air conditioning line is always shown on the lower edge of the central display.
# Select the Climate Menu entry in the air con ditioning line. The First Row of Seats menu is opened.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Depending on the external conditions, improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air are supported when the A/C function is activa ted. # Select A/C (A/C).
Setting climate control to automatic
In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem perature is controlled automatically and main tained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central
display.
% You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressingK on the climate bar on the mul timedia system.
# To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g.P.
Setting the air distribution
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of
Seats. # To set the air distribution: select,P
orO. # Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec
ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously. However, at least one zone is always active. The climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row.
Climate control 177
Setting the footwell temperature
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Set^ the footwell temperature.
Setting rear climate control (multimedia sys tem)
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu
Setting the temperature # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the temperature.
Setting the airflow # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the airflow.
Controlling the rear climate control automat ically # Select AUTO.
Deactivating rear climate control # Select REAR OFF.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC (SYNC).
Removing condensation from the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside # Press on the climate bar of the central
display. # If the windows remain fogged up: press
on the climate bar of the central display.
Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
# Pressg on the climate bar on the central display. The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching residual heat on/off
Requirements: R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature must be sufficiently
high.
178 Climate control
It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To switch on: select Residual Heat on the
climate bar on the central display.
Residual heat will be switched off automatically.
Switching residual heat on/off via the rear operating unit
Requirements: R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature must be sufficiently
high.
When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear passenger compartment, you can heat or ventilate the front and rear passenger compartments for approximately 15 minutes. # Press button4.
Activating/deactivating ionization
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor less. # Select Ionization. % The function can only be performed if the
AUTO mode is activated or the air distribu tion is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed.
Fragrance system
Setting the fragrance system
Requirements: R The climate control system is switched on. R The glove box is closed. R A flacon is inserted.
Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla con located in the glove box. # Select Fragrance. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is
reached.
Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra grance system
& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per fume
If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk.
Climate control 179
# If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons
Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. #
Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.
1 Cap 2 Flacon
# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
# To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.
Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa tion sheet with the flacon.
Information on the windshield heater
& WARNING Risk of burns from touching the windshield when the windshield heater is switched on
The windshield can become very hot when the windshield heater is switched on.
180 Climate control
The health of persons with limited tempera ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not touch the windshield while the
windshield heater is switched on. # Allow the windshield to cool down
before touching it.
The windshield heater will be enabled automati cally if is activated on the climate bar on the central display. After the vehicle is started, the windshield heater is switched on automatically as required.
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
Pre-entry climate control for departure time function
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. % This function is available only in vehicles
with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology).
The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventila ted or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked. When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority is given to charging the 48 V battery to a specified minimum charge. The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced under the following conditions: R The vehicle is not connected to power supply
equipment. R The 48 V battery is not fully charged.
With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the 48 V battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.
Climate control 181
If present, seat ventilation is activated in cooling and ventilation mode. If present, the following functions are activated in heating mode: R Seat heating R Steering wheel heater R Panel heating R Mirror heater R Rear window heating R Windshield heating
When the set temperature is changed, climate control mode will automatically be updated and switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode.
Setting pre-entry climate control for depar ture time Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Pre-entry Climate Ctrl.
Setting a single departure time # Select the pen icon next to Departure Time. # Select or set a departure time and press OK
to confirm.
Setting the week profile # Select the pen icon next to Departure Time. # Set the desired departure time, e.g. every
day at 08:00, and mark as Week Profile. # Press OK to confirm.
Selecting seats # Select Driver, Passenger, Rear Left or Rear
Right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time
Requirements: R The 48 V battery is charged sufficiently. R The function has been activated via the mul
timedia system.
# To activate: set the departure time (/ page 182). Pre-entry climate control for departure time switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another five minutes if the departure is delayed.
# To deactivate: push the& button up or down.
If present, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started: R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Panel heating
182 Climate control
Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic
ular, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly. % Immediate pre-entry climate control is avail
able only in vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology).
Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted.
# Set the temperature using the w arrows on the climate bar on the central display.
# Press button1. The red or blue indicator lamp on button1 will light up or go out.
The colors of the indicator lamp have the follow ing meanings: R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
Climate control 183
R Red: the stationary heater is switched on. R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the
vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up
(/ page 330).
# To open the center and side air vents: press button1. The three indicator lamps on the button will light up. The air vents will be opened com pletely.
# To close the center and side air vents: press button1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold outer side air vent2 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the cen ter air vent: hold air vent3 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
184 Climate control
Adjusting the rear air vents in the center console
# To open the rear air vents: press but ton1. The air vents will be opened completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will light up.
# To close the rear air vents: press but ton1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the rear air vents: hold air vent2 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment
# To open the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button1. If the button is flush with the side trim, the side air vent is open.
# To close the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button1 again. If the button protrudes from the side trim, the side air vent is closed.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold air vent2 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box
* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. # Close the air vent when you heat the
vehicle.
Climate control 185
# At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C func tion.
The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box.
1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent
# To open or close: turn controller1 to the right or left.
186 Climate control
Driving Switching on the power supply or ignition
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog
nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed.
# To switch on the power supply: press but ton1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button1 twice more.
Driving and parking 187
# To switch on the ignition: press button1 twice. The indicator lamps appear on the driver dis play.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes and the transmission is in posi tionj or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog
nized.
# Shift the transmission to positionj ori. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non- essential consumers and press button1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis play message Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual also appears in the driver display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emer gency operation mode) (/ page 188).
% You can switch off the engine while driving. By pressing button1 for about three sec onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 192).
Observe any information regarding display mes sages that can be displayed in the driver display.
Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the display mes sage Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual appears in the driver display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
188 Driving and parking
# Make sure that cup holder2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring. # Place SmartKey1 in cup holder2.
The vehicle will start after a short time. If SmartKey1 is removed from cup holder 2, the engine continues running. For further engine starts, however, SmartKey1 must be located in cup holder2 during the entire journey.
# Have SmartKey1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start: # Leave SmartKey1 in cup holder2.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi cle using the start/stop button.
% You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button.
Observe any information regarding display mes sages that can be displayed in the driver display.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv ices
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R the legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. R the starter battery is sufficiently charged.
Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.
Driving and parking 189
# Always secure the engine against unin tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Requirements: R Park positionj is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched
off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu tive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. You can stop the vehicle again at any time.
% Further information can be found in the smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Breaking-in notes
To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph
(140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive programA
or;. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat
est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer.
R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past
the pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km).
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are
either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com
190 Driving and parking
pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on optimized acceleration
If all necessary requirements and activation con ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa tion on ESP (/ page 218).
Pulling away with optimized acceleration
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use optimized acceleration, indi vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.
If ESP is deactivated, there is a risk of skid ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in
(/ page 190). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal
operating temperature.
* NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration
When pulling away with optimized accelera tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized
acceleration.
# Engage theh drive position (/ page 203).
# Move the steering wheel to the straight- ahead position.
# Select the sportiest available drive program B orC(/ page 199).
# Deactivate ESP (/ page 219). # Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with
your left foot. # With your right foot, fully depress the accel
erator pedal. # After no more than five seconds, take your
left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera tion.
# Switch on ESP once the acceleration proce dure is complete.
Ending optimized acceleration # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP.
Driving and parking 191
% After you pull away with optimized accelera tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes.
Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers
# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv
ing.
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
192 Driving and parking
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.
# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco hol and drugs while driving
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over
revving range.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal contin uously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi ately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Driving and parking 193
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and
towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Operator's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply
with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 133). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling
away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next journey
Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 358).
Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.
194 Driving and parking
Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi
cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.
The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
Function of rear axle steering
The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater maneuverability and improved driving stability, e.g. when corner ing.
Rear axle steering has the following characteris tics: R Reduced steering effort and turning radius
resulting in reduced parking effort R Improved driving stability, e.g. when corner
ing R More direct steering resulting in improved
handling of the vehicle
Observe the notes on snow chains (/ page 359) and on activating snow chain mode.
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function % The ECO start/stop function is not available
in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the driver display for this.
The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans
mission positionh ori. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
system: You depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed.
If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi
cle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you
starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel
sharply or engage reverse gear.
% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park positionj, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.
Driving and parking 195
The engine is restarted automatically if: R You engage transmission positionh ork. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the
vehicle. R You release the brake pedal. R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
system: - You release the brake pedal on a downhill
gradient and the vehicle does not roll. - The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient
and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h).
ECO start/stop function symbols in the driver display: R The symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi tions for an engine stop have been met.
R Neither the nor symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli gent stop inhibitor was detected, for exam ple, a stop sign. R Thes symbol appears: the ECO start/
stop function is deactivated or there is a mal function.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the driver display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not switch off the ignition, it is auto matically switched off after three minutes.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function
# Press button1. A display appears in the driver display when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on.
% A continuous display appears in the driver display while the ECO start/stop func tion is deactivated.
196 Driving and parking
ECO display function
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the effi ciency of your driving style and adjust it if neces sary. The ECO Display menu shows a ball1 that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics. Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style3. Ball1 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Out side the lines, the ball will light up in orange.
The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style: R Coasting at the right time R Consistent speed R Moderate acceleration
% The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is given as a percentage2 and displayed next to the ECO display. The assessment starts at 0% and can reach a maximum of 100%.
% You can call up the ECO Display function via the Classic and Exclusive menus (/ page 274).
ECO Assist function
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology) % ECO Assist is active only in drive pro
grams; andA. ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save
fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi ent.
ECO Assist display on the driver's display on the Assistance menu 1 Route event ahead 2 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
If a route event that can be dealt with more effi ciently by adjusting your driving style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol1 will be dis played.
Driving and parking 197
In addition, the symbol will be displayed until you take your foot off the accelerator or until you have passed the route event. Symbol1 will disappear as soon as ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.
The following route events can be detected by ECO Assist: 3 Roundabout 4 S-curve 5 Sharp curve 6 T-intersection 7 Downhill gradient
8 Vehicle in front 9 Speed limit
% Only route event8 "vehicle in front" will be displayed in drive programA.
System limits If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be fore seen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi
cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R If the windshield is dirty in the area of the multifunction camera, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are covered. R If the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in
roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button
% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The chosen drive program appears in the driver display. = Individual R individual settings
198 Driving and parking
B Sport+ R very sporty driving style with lowered sus
pension R emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering
and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
C Sport R sporty driving style with lowered suspension R still sporty, but with an emphasis on stability R allows the sporty driver a more active driving
style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
A Comfort R comfortable and economical driving R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road conditions
; Eco R particularly economical driving R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road conditions
Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R drive
- engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC - availability of glide mode R ESP
R suspension - suspension and damping - vehicle level R steering
Selecting the drive program
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button1 on the left or right. The chosen drive program appears in the dis play of the button.
Driving and parking 199
Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I # Select Individual. # Select and set a category.
Switching the reset display on/off # Switch Request at Start on or off.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard settings.
Function off: the next time the vehicle is star ted theA drive program is set automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is activated auto matically.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be
achieved for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).
Variables that can influence this are, for example: R Sea level R fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine
% The values displayed serve only as orienta tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the central display may deviate from the actual values.
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Consumption.
The current and average consumption is dis played.
200 Driving and parking
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tionh ork, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position
h ork when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is shown in the driver display.
j Park position k Reverse gear
Driving and parking 201
i Neutral h Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
% To shift into neutrali with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev eral seconds to the first point of resistance.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the vehicle is at a standstill.
# Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off.
The Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P message appears on the driver's display. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the
SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans mission remains in neutrali.
The park positionj is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met: R You switch to transmission positionh or
k. R You press thej button.
Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 207). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
comes to a standstill.
# When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but tonj. When the transmission position display showsj, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position displayj appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time untilj is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.
Park positionj is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission position is h ork. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle
is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position ish or k. R You switch off the engine and bring the vehi
cle to a standstill when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission position ish ork.
202 Driving and parking
R You switch off the engine, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission posi tion isi. R Engaging park positionj automatically is
required by the vehicle.
% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission positionh ork again.
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion positionh, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed
Manual gearshifting
When the automatic transmission is shifted to positionh, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual gear shifting is deactivated.
Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle1 or2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display showsp and the current gear.
% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti vated is dependent on various factors. Manual gearshifting can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission positionh is
engaged again R Driving style
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle1.
# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display showsh.
Driving and parking 203
Permanent setting: # Change to drive program=(/ page 199). # Select drive settingp (/ page 200).
Gearshift recommendation
The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.
# If gearshift recommendation1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown
# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.
Glide mode function
With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position displayh is
shown in green. R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ Boost technology): The com bustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met: R Drive program; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program=.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine
204 Driving and parking
R Traffic situation
Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.
Refueling Refueling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.
Driving and parking 205
# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.
% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel.
206 Driving and parking
Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table
4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type
# Press the back area of fuel filler flap1. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it. # Insert the fuel filler cap from above into
bracket2. # Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off. # Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel filler flap1.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi cle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to positionj.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
Driving and parking 207
# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
208 Driving and parking
# Engage transmission positionj in a station ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 202).
# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button1.
# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.
& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener
When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. # Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of movement of the door.
Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea
ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S.
safety standards
Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.
Driving and parking 209
# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 flashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.
# Press and hold button6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green contin
uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 flashes green. Pro
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.
# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects
are located outside the range of movement of the door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control5. # Hold remote control5 at various angles
from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
# Hold remote control5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
210 Driving and parking
# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button6 on remote control5 again before transmission ends.
# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on
1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://
www.homelink.com/mercedes
Opening or closing the garage door
Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
# Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.
Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp4 flashes green: release
buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake
Function of the electric parking brake (apply ing automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in positionj and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 212).
Driving and parking 211
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta
tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.
The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in positionh ork and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission positionj toh or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in positionk, the
trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: - You shift from transmission positionj.
- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the electric parking brake is released, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually
Applying
212 Driving and parking
# Push handle1. The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp lights up in the driver display.
% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously.
Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle1.
The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp in the driver display goes out.
Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The redF (USA) or! (Can ada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver dis play.
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged. R The force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
story garage.
% Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system (/ page 213).
% If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili tate the next engine start.
System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied
Setting collision detection on a parked vehi cle
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate the function under Col-
lision detection.
Driving and parking 213
% A maximum of three incidents can be regis tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwrit ten if they have not been deleted already.
Activating or deactivating the collision pho tos function Please note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings. # Activate or deactivate Collision photos.
Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me app # Select Upload Collision Photos. # Scan the QR code on the central display with
the Mercedes me app. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.
% Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me app.
Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive # Connect a USB flash drive . # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Copy (USB).
All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive.
% To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.
Deleting collision photos # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Delete.
All collision photos will be deleted.
Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-oper ation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears
in the driver's display. R The connection to online services is interrup
ted.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine.
214 Driving and parking
Charge the starter battery in the following situa tions: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended. R The starter battery charge level is insufficient
for standby mode.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (park ing the vehicle for an extended period)
Requirements: R The engine is switched off.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode.
Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic condi tions.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar, lidar or ultrasonic sen sors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
Driving and parking 215
% The radar and lidar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star.
1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors 3 Ultrasonic sensors 4 Front camera 5 Rear view camera
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi cle sensors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cam eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors
or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 333). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras.
Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear win dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 217) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 217) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 218) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 219) R ESP trailer stabilization R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 219) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 219) R HOLD function (/ page 220)
216 Driving and parking
R Hill Start Assist (/ page 221) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 221) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 241) R Traffic light view (/ page 244) R AIRMATIC (/ page 253)
Driving Assistance package R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 223) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend
ent) (/ page 227) R Route-based speed adaptation (country-
dependent) (/ page 228) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 236) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 230) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-
dependent) (/ page 233) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend
ent) (/ page 234) R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend
ent) (/ page 230)
R Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 247) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 250) R PRE-SAFE Impulse Side (/ page 59)
Parking Package R Rear view camera (/ page 255) R Surround view camera (/ page 257) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 261) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 265)
Function of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
Function of BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres
sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Driving and parking 217
Function of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro gram)
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
ESP can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
When ESP is deactivated, the warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking.
When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary when pulling away.
Deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 530) R Display messages (/ page 478)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP
The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate
218 Driving and parking
ESP mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 199).
Function of ESP Crosswind Assist
ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ
ual brake application on one side.
Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program)
Multimedia system: 4 5 5y
% ESP can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP
can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
# Select ESP. # Select On or Off.
ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Function of EBD
Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid
System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.
Driving and parking 219
HOLD function
HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away before you leave it.
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti
vated. R The transmission is in positionh,k ori.
Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short
time quickly depress further until the display appears in the driver's display.
# Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the dis
play disappears from the driver's display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted. R The transmission is shifted to positionj. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park
ing brake.
220 Driving and parking
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission positionj and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
In addition, the Brake Immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.
# Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions: R The transmission is in positionh ork.
R The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection % The microsleep detection subfunction is only
available in combination with the driver cam era.
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well- rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: increased system sensitivity: the
driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by the system is adapted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the driver display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
Driving and parking 221
will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
The following information is displayed in the driver display: R The length of the journey since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: - The more segments2 of the circle dis
played, the higher the detected attention level.
- Fewer segments2 are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases.
R Microsleep detection1 status:
- Deactivated: display1 is hidden. - Activated but not operational: display1
is gray. - Activated and operational: display1 is
green.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTEN- TION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break! warning message appears in the driver display and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warn ing message must be confirmed by Touch Con trol. It is recommended that you take a break immediately. If a warning is given in the driver display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga tion to this rest area. ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is activated automatically when the engine is
restarted. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 12.5 mph (20 km/h) and above. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx
imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the clock is set to the incorrect time. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre
quently In active driving situations.
222 Driving and parking
Microsleep detection also does not function when the driver camera cannot detect the eyes of the driver, as a result of the following factors, for example: R The driver's eyes are covered due to the
steering column position, for example. R Poor ambient light. R Some types of eyeglasses or sunglasses. R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver
camera's field of vision.
Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver dis play. The tiredness and alertness assessment of ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting the sensitivity # Tap the current setting. # Select Standard or Sensitive.
Activating/deactivating the microsleep warning # Activate/deactivate Microsleep Warning.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the
vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is available in the 15 mph (20 km/h) to 130 mph (210 km/h) speed range. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) (/ page 198) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) R Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into
account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country-dependent)
Additional function available in certain coun tries: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automat ically follow the vehicle in front when driving off
Driving and parking 223
again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ready to pull away when the green vehicle symbol flashes cyclically. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
Driver display in the Assistancemenu
1 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator 3 Set specified distance
Vehicle detected in front1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permit ted to overtake on the right, for example on high ways.
Permanent status display R (white): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set
R (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected
The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedome ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is grayed out. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. When the set specified distance is increased or decreased, the display briefly appears under the vehicle in the permanent status dis play. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the
green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas sive mode. The Suspended message appears on the driver display.
224 Driving and parking
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is
dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep
uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis
tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita
ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes
Driving and parking 225
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in positionh. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed. R Snow chain mode is not active
(/ page 359).
J Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates the variable limiter/Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed K Increases/decreases the specified dis
tance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.
Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # PressH.
Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: on
control panel1 pressM on the upper section orN on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
or # To activate with a stored speed: press J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.
226 Driving and parking
Increasing or reducing the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
from the bottom of control panel1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph
(1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down
wards from the top of control panel1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph
(1 km/h). or # Briefly pressM on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h).
or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # PressM on the upper section of control
panel1.
Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver display # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
# PressJ. The limit speed displayed in the driver display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # PressJ. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Reducing or increasing the specified dis tance from the vehicle in front # PressK.
The display appears under the status display. The specified distance is reduced by one level.
If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
# Press. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP
intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected
Driving and parking 227
and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 230). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If you are driving on German highways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traf fic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 241). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h)
R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer
# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 230). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves
228 Driving and parking
R Roundabouts R T-intersections R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic )
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand still. If a corresponding route event is detected while route guidance is active, the first speed adjust ment is carried out automatically. If the turn sig nal indicator is switched on, the selected route is
confirmed and further speed adjustment is acti vated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off
before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable: R Unclear roads R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi
vidual lanes, for example at toll stations R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula
ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
Driving and parking 229
Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles
Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist
Selecting a driving style # Select DYNAMIC SELECT based , Dynamic or
Comfort.
Setting speed adaptation # Select When cornering etc. or For limits.
When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted according to a route event ahead or to speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist.
% When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Variable limiter
Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).
% Further information on speed adaptation (/ page 228).
Function of Active Traffic Jam Assist Active Traffic Jam Assist helps you when in traf fic jams on multi-lane roads with separate road ways by automatically pulling away within 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneu vers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Traffic Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Traffic Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically when all of the following conditions are met: R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or high-
speed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted and active (/ page 226). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active
(/ page 232). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph
(60 km/h).
When Active Traffic Jam Assist is active the status display appears in the driver display.
System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 230).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of
230 Driving and parking
moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower
speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.
Permanent status display in the driver dis play Gray: activated and passive Green: activated and active Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to
actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected
% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as
enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray in the driver display.
Contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis
play message1 appears in the driver display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initi ated (/ page 233). The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel. Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in the following situations: R The driver is wearing gloves. R There is a steering wheel cover on the steer
ing wheel.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
Driving and parking 231
System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or at intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On very tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll plazas. R When actively changing lane without switch
ing on the turn signal indicator. R When the tire pressure is too low.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.
# Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
# Always steer the vehicle paying atten tion to traffic conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist
Requirements: R ESP is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select Act. Steering Asst. .
232 Driving and parking
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sen sors to monitor whether the driver holds the steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if necessary. If Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane.
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer
ing wheel, visual warning1 is issued. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes sage. Also observe the instructions on the contact detection of Active Steering Assist (/ page 230). Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the follow ing warnings in order: R Display message1 appears in the driver
display. R In addition to display1 a warning tone
sounds. R The Beginning Emergency Stop message
appears in the driver display, a continuous warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments
until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impul ses are also produced.
Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possi ble. % It is only possible to change across one lane
and only into the right-hand lane, and not onto the hard shoulder.
Depending on the country, the hazard warning lights are switched on when automatic braking is initiated. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park
ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steer ing.
Driving and parking 233
You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer gency Stop Assist after automatic braking is ini tiated by one of the following actions: R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop
is canceled, but the warning message, warn ing tone and power steering remain active R Steering: power-assisted steering is can
celed, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked
% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within one ignition cycle. After this Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are deactivated for that ignition cycle.
System limits If Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect lane markings, Active Emergency Stop Assist is not active.
For the detection of vehicles and other obsta cles, observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 223) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 230) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 234)
Active Lane Change Assist
Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes and is activated by indicat ing briefly. For this, the following conditions must be fulfil led: R You are on a freeway or high-speed major
road. R The vehicle speed is between approximately
45 mph (70 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R The adjacent lane is separated by a broken
lane marking.
R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane. R Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the
multimedia system. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active
Steering Assist are switched on and active.
234 Driving and parking
Driver display in the Assistancemenu
1 Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: lane change canceled
When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the display appears along with green arrows in the driver display. If the system has been activa ted but is not currently available, the dis
play appears along with gray arrows in the driver display. If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has indicated briefly. The lane change is shown to the driver with a flashing green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. Green arrow1 is dis played in the appropriate adjacent lane in the Assistance menu in the driver display. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. If a lane change is not possible directly after the driver has activated the turn signal indicator because an obstacle has been detected, for example, the arrow will also flash in green next to the steering wheel symbol and the adja cent lane will continue to be monitored. When the lane becomes free, a lane change will be car ried out and the Lane Change to the Left mes sage, for example, appears in the driver display. If the green arrows stop flashing, the lane change must be activated again.
Active Lange Change Assist can be canceled in various situations, including the following: R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g.
detected obstacle). R The driver steers with too much force or in
the opposite direction. R The driver moves the turn signal indicator in
the opposite direction. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active
Steering Assist is deactivated. R The vehicle cannot make the lane change as
planned.
Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis played as follows: R The arrow in the selected direction of travel
turns red. R A corresponding message appears on the
driver display. R In certain circumstances a warning tone
sounds.
Driving and parking 235
& WARNING Risk of accident when chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.
# Monitor the lane change.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on the steering wheel.
Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.
System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 230). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty
(/ page 215). R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction. R The system does not detect a suitable road,
for example, in tight curves. R The vehicle is on a construction site.
% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process, and no arrows are dis played next to the Active Steering Assist symbol.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select the function.
Active Brake Assist
Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Evasive Steering Assist (country-specific)
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.
236 Driving and parking
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis tance warning lamp lights up.
In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance 1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves2 appear in front of the vehicle.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 165).
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, pop up1 appears in the driver display and then automati cally goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated.
Driving and parking 237
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, appears in the driver display. If the system is unavailable or the functions are restricted, appears.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: The distance warning function issues a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and theL distance warning lamp lights up in the driver's display.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten sioning of the seat belt.
If possible, brake immediately or maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Distance warning function The distance warning function can assist you by means of an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead.
R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph
(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.
Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h): R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph
(120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph
(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles.
238 Driving and parking
R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.
Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h): R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph
(120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph
(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists.
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Reaction to oncoming road users Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users: R Reaction up to speeds of approximately
62 mph (100 km/h) R Warning for oncoming road users through
acoustic warning and warning lamp
R Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident
Evasive Steering Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva sive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.
# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.
Driving and parking 239
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics: R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi
cles. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately
13 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx imately 68 mph (110 km/h).
The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be canceled at any time by counter steering.
System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If the system is unavailable or the functions are restricted, the warning lamp appears in the driver's display.
The system may be impaired or may not func tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered. (/ page 215) R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move
quickly into the sensor detection range. R If road users are hidden by other objects or
are located close to other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist
cannot be distinguished from the back ground.
R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On curves with a tight radius.
% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in proc ess.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.
The setting is retained when the engine is next started.
240 Driving and parking
Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.
The distance warning function, the autono mous braking function and the Evasive Steer ing Assist are deactivated. When the engine is next started, the medium setting is automatically selected.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares this with information in the digital navigation map. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the driver display and in the head-up display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum per missible speed.
In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. The camera also detects and analyzes traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist only visualizes selected signs in the driver display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown in the driver display. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur
roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula
tions
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
Messages in the driver display
1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction
The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver display simultaneously. The system always prioritizes displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver display, for example, when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit1 is transmitted to the limiter or Active Distance Assist
Driving and parking 241
DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display.
Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed
Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display follow ing traffic signs1: R Speed limitations R End of the speed limit R Overtaking restrictions R Play streets R Recommended speeds
Traffic Sign Assist can detect following addi tional signs3 and, if necessary, analyze the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors: R In wet conditions R On slippery road surfaces R In fog R Temporary restrictions R Exits R Limits for vehicle/trailer combinations
Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. Therefore, when you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a freeway exit or entry road for exam ple, or after you turn at an intersection, the dis play in the driver display can be updated without a traffic sign having been detected. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur rently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver display:
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun tries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously. % Also observe the information on display mes
sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 478).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can set the warning to visual only (the traffic sign flashes three times in the driver display) or visual and acoustic, including a warning tone.
Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist (country-specific) Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a
242 Driving and parking
section of road, for example on freeway entry roads or one-way streets. Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h). Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, for example if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several differ ent signs are detected. Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally. The following conditions must be fulfilled: R Several traffic lights have been detected. R All traffic lights detected are red.
R At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane. R The traffic lights are in the following
sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green.
% If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further Warn- ings (/ page 244).
%
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu
mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If traffic signs are difficult to detect, e.g. due
to dirt, snow, ice, insufficient lighting or driv ing too close to the vehicle in front, or because they are covered, faded, damaged, badly positioned or twisted. R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not
be detected correctly or at all due to techni cal factors, such as transmission frequency. R If the information on the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g.
traffic signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, in adjacent lanes or parallel roads. R If signs do not conform to the standard. R If signs or road layouts are specific to the
country and deviate from the route guidance in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond construction sites.
Driving and parking 243
R After sharp turns and tight bends, when traf fic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs
which are affixed or attached to them.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating the speed warning # Activate or deactivate Speed Limit Warning.
Setting the type of warning # Select next to Speed Limit Warning. # Select Visual & Audible or Visual.
Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Set the desired speed under Warning Thresh-
old.
Activating or deactivating further functions of Traffic Sign Assist # Activate or deactivate Further Warnings.
The available functions are activated or deac tivated.
Setting the type of warning for further func tions # Select next to Further Warnings. # Select Visual & Audible or Visual.
Traffic light view
Information on the traffic light view The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The cam era image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off.
Displaying traffic light view
Requirements: R The Traffic Light View option is switched on. R A traffic light view is available.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Light View % This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown in the central display. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out. # ActivateD or deactivateE Traffic
Light View.
Using other available functions # Select. # Select On Request or Automatic.
If On Request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. If Automatic is set, the camera image is auto matically displayed when the traffic light view is available.
244 Driving and parking
Overview of the traffic light data service
& WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data
The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. # Keep the actual traffic situation con
stantly in view when approaching a traf fic light and when changing lanes.
# Avoid prolonged viewing of the Instru ment Display and Head-up Display.
The traffic lights and countdown of the remain ing time1 until the next green phase are shown in the driver display.
Example representation in the driver display
The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green. % The display also goes out in the following
cases: R When turning off before the intersection
into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection
% The direction arrows are displayed depend ing on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active
route guidance
If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed.
% Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes-Benz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwar ded to the provider of the traffic light infor mation service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not per manently saved. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the
Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % This traffic light data service is only available
in certain cities and regions.
Driving and parking 245
The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia
system featuring navigation and a communi cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes
me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the
user account. R The navigation services option is available,
subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The traffic light data service is within the
scope of the navigation service.
The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traf fic light data service provider. The provider gath ers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle.
A set turn signal left or right and lane recom mendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, sys tems or components. Please note that the dis played data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situa tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The driver display is shown after selecting the Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur
roundings and weather conditions R observe actual traffic signs R observe applicable traffic rules and regula
tions
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers.
System limits The display does not appear in the following sit uations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green
phase is less than ten seconds. R Emergency vehicles or local public transport
are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has
been interrupted. R Light signal systems are located in a con
struction site area or are being maintained. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired.
246 Driving and parking
Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Function of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles traveling from speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. Status display in the driver's display Gray: the system is activated but inopera
tive. Green: the system is activated and opera
tional.
Driver display in the Assistance menu
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the cor responding outside mirror. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror1 also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds twice and the warning lamp flashes red in the respective outside mirror. Red radar waves2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the assis tance graphic.
If the turn signal indicator remains on, the dis play in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if
Warning Support is activated, the Active Blind Spot Assist warning is also accompa nied by ambient lighting (/ page 165).
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following: R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so
that it is in the blind spot area R if vehicles traveling at a much faster
speed approach and then overtake
Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn ings or intervene in such situations.
Driving and parking 247
# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle.
Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave the stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear ance.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corre sponding outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the correspond ing outside mirror flash red. Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle occupant moves in to the area of the door. % Vehicles with ambient lighting or active
ambient lighting: theWarning Support of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated (/ page 165).
% The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting.
The exit warning is only available when Active Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi mum of three minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The exit warning is no longer
available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants.
System limits Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the fol lowing situations, in particular: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the center of
their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi
248 Driving and parking
cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro longed time. Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course- correcting brake application.
# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the following situations: R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. R If vehicles approach and overtake you at
a greatly different speed.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn ings or intervene in such situations.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis play1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
Driving and parking 249
System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situa tions: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is
detected.
Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Blind Spot Assist # Select Active Blind Spot Assist. # Select On or Off.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc tion camera (/ page 215) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering interven tion and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keep ing Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).
The system can intervene in the following situa tions: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking. R One of your front wheels goes over a lane
marking.
If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steer ing intervention does not occur on the corre sponding side. If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention occurs regardless of the turn signal indicator. If you leave the lane without using the turn signal indicator, but an obstacle is detected in your lane, a steering intervention does not occur.
250 Driving and parking
Display1 will appear in the driver display and a warning tone will sound in the following situa tions: R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keep
ing Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds. R The system carries out two or more steering
interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver.
In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinu
ous lane markings or only continuous lane mark ings (/ page 253).
Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is
deactivated. Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please
also observe the display messages. Gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti
vated, but not operating. Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is
activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corre sponding side.
Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui ded you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: if both lane markings are simultaneously shown in red in the status display, Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop (/ page 233).
Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu
If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver's dis play.
Driving and parking 251
% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accom panied by ambient lighting (/ page 165).
System limits In the following situations, no lane-correcting steering intervention occurs but rather a warning in the steering wheel, depending on the situa tion: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel
erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed.
The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov
ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 215).
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch the function on or off.
Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated in the Assistance menu. % After starting the engine, the settings are
country-specific.
252 Driving and parking
Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity # Select. # Select Early, Med. or Late.
The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the engine is started. % The standard setting for this function is
dependent on the country.
Activating or deactivating assistance on dis continuous lane markings # Select Advanced Support.
The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the engine is started. % The standard setting for this function is
dependent on the country.
AIRMATIC
Function of AIRMATIC AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia ble damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clear ance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con sumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions: R Air suspension with automatic all-round level
control R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption R Increased vehicle level for greater ground
clearance, selected via the multimedia sys tem R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment)
Suspension setting depending on the drive program Drive programC andB: R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when
driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). R When driving at speeds below 50 mph
(80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
Drive programA and;: R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when
driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when
driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h). R When driving at speeds below 75 mph
(120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
Driving and parking 253
R When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level.
Setting the vehicle level
& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high
Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited
to the driving style and the road surface conditions.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering
Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehi cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked. # When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.
* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering
Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.
# Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.
Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph
(60 km/h). R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/
bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).
Multimedia system: 4 5 5y
Raising the vehicle # Select .
The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1.
Your selection is saved. The off-road level +1 set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off.
254 Driving and parking
The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit uations: R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R When driving briefly between 37 mph
(60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). R After selecting a different drive program
using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/
bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).
Lowering the vehicle # Select .
The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.
% In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack).
Rear view camera
Function of the rear view camera The rear view camera monitors the area behind your vehicle. When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is automati cally shown in the central display. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing. % The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mir ror. Camera Viewsmenu (top view)
1 Menu Parking Assist 2 Rear view camera with top view 3 Wide-angle view 4 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 264) 5 Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
Driving and parking 255
6 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area
7 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
8 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
9 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings7 are displayed in green (/ page 265).
Wide-angle view
System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- tem Inoperative message appears in the central display.
The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog
ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 333). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam
aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional
256 Driving and parking
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket or bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired
by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
Surround view camera
Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con sists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, for example, or at exits with reduced visibility. If this function is activated, the image from the rear view camera is automatically displayed in the central display when reverse gear is selec ted .
The surround view camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substi tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu vering area while maneuvering and parking.
Menu overview Camera Views
1 Menu Parking Assist 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with image from the rear view cam
era 4 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle 5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle 6 3D auto view
Driving and parking 257
7 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 264)
8 To set the GPS activation point (/ page 261)
9 To switch between standard and wide-angle view
% In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (/ page 261).
Function of the guide lines
1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area
2 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 265).
Top view with image from the front or rear view camera If this function is activated, the image from the rear view camera is automatically displayed in the central display when reverse gear is selec ted .
1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
take at the current steering wheel angle
258 Driving and parking
3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle
* NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all
Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely dis torted when displayed or not displayed at all. # Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects etc. in the maneu vering area while maneuvering and parking.
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
In the 3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehi cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the trans mission position, the view is automatically adap ted.
3D auto view % The area behind the vehicle is not displayed
as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
2 Guide lines
In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes auto matically when approaching obstacles. If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.
Driving and parking 259
Wide-angle view
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
2 To switch between standard and wide-angle view
System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- tem Inoperative message appears in the central display.
The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa tions: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded
out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog
ged up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop.
% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise
injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 333).
260 Driving and parking
Calling up the surround view camera views using the button
# Press button1. # Select the Camera Views menu. # In the multimedia system, select the desired
view (/ page 257).
Selecting a view for the surround view cam era (reverse gear) # Shift to reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia
system (/ page 257).
Surround view camera with GPS - managing activation positions Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera
Renaming an activation position % You can determine activation positions in the
Camera Views menu. (/ page 257) # Select an activation position. # Select. # Enter a name and confirm.
The activation position is saved under the new name.
Deleting an activation position # Select Manage Activation Positions. # Select an activation position.
# SelectE. # Confirm the prompt.
The activation position is deleted.
Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front
Driving and parking 261
or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a dis tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obsta cles on all sides can be shown. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
Messages in the central display
Vehicles with surround view camera
Vehicles with rear view camera
As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera tional, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Operational, all around and obstacle detec
ted
The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approx. 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.2 ft (0.7 m) R Orange: approx. 2.2 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft
(0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m)
Vehicles with surround view camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detec ted. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn Early set
262 Driving and parking
ting, the system warns you from a distance of 3.3 ft (1 m), in the standard setting only from 1.2 ft (0.4 m).
Vehicles with surround view camera
Vehicles with rear view camera
If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, at speeds below 8 mph (12 km/h) (vehicles with out Active Parking Assist) or 11 mph (18 km/h) (vehicles with Active Parking Assist), pop up win dow1 appears in the central display.
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front2 and 2.2 ft (0.7 m) on sides3 can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.
Driving and parking 263
R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi cle from the side. R Objects placed next to the vehicle.
Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol lowing situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni
tion. R You open the doors.
After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 255) R Surround view camera (/ page 257)
Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 215).
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately 3 seconds and then
goes out, and the symbol appears in the driver display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interfer ence. Start the vehicle again and check if Park ing Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors
and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 333). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been
deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.
# When parking or maneuvering the vehi cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged.
Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window
appears.
# Tap= in the central display.
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the symbol appears in the instru ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the engine is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.
264 Driving and parking
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking
Setting the volume or pitch of the warning tones # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone
Pitch.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout # Activate or deactivate Audio Fadeout.
The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.
or # Switch Audio Fadeout When in R on or off.
The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged.
Setting the time of the warnings # Select Time of Warning. # Set the time for the warning.
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur round view camera. When you are driving for wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following func tions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Backing up into parking spaces perpendicu
lar to the road
Vehicles with surround view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to
the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for exam ple at the roadside) R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road R Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the
road (optionally either left or right)
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. If Active Parking Assist is available, the message appears in the driver display. When the system detects parking spaces, appears. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the central display. The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal
Driving and parking 265
culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the proce dure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steer ing and gear changes. To start the parking procedure, press thec button (/ page 267). Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol lowing situations: R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You press thec button again. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission positionj. R ESP intervenes. R You open the driver's door.
System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 255) R Surround view camera (/ page 257)
Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, such as over hanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain environmental conditions, such as snow fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
266 Driving and parking
R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly after a tire change or when spare
tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.
after bottoming out on a curb. R On steep inclines of more than approximately
15%.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
# Press button1.
# Select Parking Assistance menu2.
Parking spaces3 detected by the system are shown in the central display.
Driving and parking 267
When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path4 into currently selected parking space 5 also appears. # If parking spaces are displayed: bring the
vehicle to a standstill. # If necessary, select another parking space.
# Vehicles with surround view camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selec ted parking space again.
# To start the parking procedure: press but ton1 again. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
The turn signal indicator is switched on automat ically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indi cator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Con- trol of Vehicle display message appears. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa ble, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be can celed. You can also interrupt the parking pro cedure by braking, for example, to let people in or out of the vehicle. The parking proce dure can then be continued by briefly press ing the accelerator pedal.
268 Driving and parking
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist
Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view
camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active
Parking Assist.
# Start the vehicle. # Press button1.
# Select Parking Assistance menu2. # If necessary, change direction of exit3. # To start exiting the parking space: press
button1 again. # If necessary, change the transmission posi
tion. Observe any messages displayed in the driver display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If nec essary, select the turn signal indicator accord ingly. After the parking space has been exited, a warn ing tone and the Active Parking Assist Fin- ished: Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear your self again. If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill.
Maneuvering assistance
Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehi cle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h).
Driving and parking 269
A risk of collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals. R If the driver engages an incorrect gear. R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal
with too much force.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle was stationary and the trans
mission position was changed tok orh. R If the vehicle has rolled less than approx
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) since being at a stand still. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
% You can activate and deactivate Drive-away Assist (/ page 272).
If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu:
% If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.
System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 265). On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted.
Function of cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning can warn you of cross ing traffic when you are backing up out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. The cross traffic warning is automatically active when you reverse at a speed of less than approx imately 6 mph (10 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu:
270 Driving and parking
The vehicle can be automatically braked. % If the cross traffic warning is not available,
the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.
The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning
The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.
System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 265). If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. In the following situations, the cross traffic warn ing is not available: R On inclines
Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent col lisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view cam era detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.
The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower
than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the central
display (/ page 261).
% You can activate and deactivate the maneu vering brake function (/ page 272).
If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selec ted view in the Camera & Parking menu:
% If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.
The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver
Driving and parking 271
ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function
The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation; do not rely on the maneu vering brake function alone.
# Be ready to brake.
System limits Observe the system limits of the following func tions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 265) R Surround view camera (/ page 257) R Rear view camera (/ page 255)
The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines
Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis tance Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking # Select Maneuvering Assistance. # Activate or deactivate the desired maneuver
ing assistance. % Maneuvering assistance systems must be
active for the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 269) and the maneuvering brake function (/ page 271).
Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods (/ page 350) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 351).
272 Driving and parking
Notes on the driver display
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a driver display malfunction
If the driver display has failed or malfunc tioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The driver display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level and coolant temperature. Additional functions available to you include the following: R Different menus, for Assistance and Naviga
tion
R Status displays for the driver assistance sys tems R Display messages R Indicator and warning lamps R Information on Consumption and range
The menu contents and settings can be individu ally adjusted and set.
Notes on the 3D driver display The 3D driver display enables a spatial represen tation of the content of the driver display. It is a prerequisite that the driver be recorded by the driver camera.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The driver camera is deactivated or is not
working. R The driver is outside the detection range of
the driver camera.
R The operating conditions are not in place, e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or too high.
Operating the driver display
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the driver display.
Driver display 273
Scrolling on the menu bar
1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control
The content of the driver display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. Touch Control3 is used to navi gate in a vertical and horizontal direction with
one finger. Confirm the selection by pressing the Touch Control. % To operate Touch Control3 in the most
effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display (/ page 294).
# Briefly press main menu button2. # Select a menu by swiping to the left or right
on Touch Control3. # Press Touch Control3 to confirm.
Menus on the driver display Notes on the menus on the driver display
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the driver display. The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver display: R Understated R Sport R Exclusive R Classic R Navigation R Assistance R Service
In some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the center display area.
274 Driver display
In most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content. % You can find further information about the
possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display
The Head-up Display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example. You can use the Head-up Display menu bar to select different contexts, e.g.: R Minimal R Sport R Standard R Augmented reality R ECO display R Settings R Head-up Display
The following image shows an example of the context with augmented reality.
Head-up Display with navigation and aug mented reality (10x5)
1 Navigation instructions 2 Augmented reality navigation instructions 3 Navigation status displays, such as remain
ing distance to the destination, expected time of arrival
4 Active Lane Keeping Assist status 5 Steer Assist status 6 Current speed
7 Set speed in the driver assistance system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
8 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)
When you receive a call, the6 Call Waiting message will appear on the Head-up Display.
System limits Visibility is particularly influenced by the follow ing conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses
Driver display 275
Function of the Head-up Display with aug mented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to distraction as well as incorrect representation or interpretation of the display
When driving, you should not base your actions on the augmented reality display of the Head-up Display. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation. # Avoid looking at the augmented reality
display of the Head-up Display for an extended period of time.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi tional information
The additional information from the augmen ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.
The Head-up Display with augmented reality projects content into the driver's field of vision, such as: R Information from and visualization of the nav
igation system R Information and visualization of the driver
assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Information from the menus of the driver dis
play
Head-up Display with augmented reality (example)
1 Marker of the detected vehicle in front (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
2 Change-of-direction arrows for the route (navigation)
3 Status line for driver assistance systems
The marker of the detected vehicle in front and the change-of-direction arrows for the route are dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist regulates your speed based on this. The change- of-direction arrows point the way calculated by the navigation system.
276 Driver display
System limits Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitized. Visibility is influenced by the following condi tions: R Driver camera and multifunction camera
recording R The extent to which the windshield in the
area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured.
Further system limits of the Head-up Display (/ page 275).
Operating the Head-up Display
Selecting display content of the Head-up Dis play via the menu bar of the driver display # Press the main menu button on the
left.
# To select the menu bar of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch-Control.
# To switch between types of display con tent on the Head-up Display: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display shows a preview of the selected display contents after each swipe.
# Press thea button to confirm the desired content.
Switching back to the driver display # Press theG or button.
Setting the position and brightness # On the menu bar of the Head-up Display,
select the Settings menu by swiping to the left or right.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed graphically on the Head-up Display as well as on the driver display.
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the right or left on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically.
# Press theG ora button to exit the settings.
% Vehicles with augmented reality func tion: when the position is adjusted, the sta tus bar will be moved upward and the display area reduced. This may impair visibility of the augmented reality slightly.
Driver display 277
Selecting the Head-up Display with augmen ted reality
# Press the main menu button on the left.
# To select the menu bar of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch-Control.
or # Press and hold thea button. # To select the Head-up Display with aug
mented reality: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch-Control to activate the desired content.
Switching the Head-up Display on/off
Driver display: 4
Switching on # Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con
trol. Head-up Display will appear.
# Press left-hand Touch Controla.
Switching off # Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con
trol. # Select Head-up Display by swiping on the
left-hand Touch Control. # Press left-hand Touch Controla.
Setting the Head-up Display in the multime dia system
Multimedia system: 4 5 5y
Switching the 3D display for the driver dis play on or off # Select 3D Driver Display.
The 3D display of the driver display is switched on or off.
% The 3D display for the driver display is only activated when the driver camera detects the driver. Otherwise, the driver display switches from the 3D display to the 2D dis play (/ page 273).
Switching the Head-up Display on/off # Select Head-up Display.
The Head-up Display is activated or deactiva ted.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology)
1 POWER shows the electric drive support. 2 CHARGE shows the recuperation power of
the electric motor.
shows the drive system's operational read iness.
278 Driver display
Overview of status displays on the driver display The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in areas1 to4.
Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistance display)
Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 267)
Active Parking Assist has detected a park ing space (/ page 267)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 264)
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 223)
Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 223)
Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 240)
Active Brake Assist impaired or not func tioning (/ page 240)
Active Steering Assist (/ page 230) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 234) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 250) Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assis
tance display) (/ page 249) Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 197) ECO start/stop function (/ page 195) HOLD function (/ page 220) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 161)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 162)
Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 230)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 241).
Driver display 279
Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Expe rience. Operating Touch Control
2 Central display with touch functionality Home screen overview Operating the touchscreen
3 Control panel with fingerprint sensor, switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the mute function on or offa and adjusts the volume
Further operating options: R Conducting a dialog with the MBUX Voice
Assistant. R Operating functions contact-free with the
MBUX Interior Assistant. The interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or head movements. R If the vehicle is equipped with a driver cam
era, functions can be triggered via "Look & Answer".
% You can find further information about oper ation as well as about applications and serv ices in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
280 MBUX multimedia system
Home screen overview
1 Status line 2 Calls up user profile settings and switches
user 3 Using the global search 4 Calls up the Control Center (pull down) 5 Calls up favorites 6 Displays in the status line
7 Calls up applications 8 Quick-access to application 9 Global menu G Calls up previous menu Calls up the home screen Previous track or previous radio sta tion Next track or next radio station Active call: display of the call duration
In the image, the applications are arranged as a carousel. Pressing and holding on arranges the applications in a grid. This presentation is also used by a smartphone, for example. The following functions are called up in the Con trol Center: R Notifications Center R Content sharing menu R Favorites R Vehicle quick-access
Content sharing menu
Example: showing displays 1 Calls up a menu 2 Central display with active content (cover
display) 3 Displays animation for content sharing 4 Bluetooth headphones connected to
the right rear display
MBUX multimedia system 281
5 Rear displays with active content (cover dis play)
6 MBUX rear tablet
To share content, drag a display and drop it over another display. To control media playback, tap a display.
Operating the MBUX multimedia system
Using Touch Control
1 Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control
=9: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm)
3G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call 5 ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Increase volume: swipe upwards
Reduce volume: swipe down 8 Switch off the sound: press
7 Calls up favorites (press briefly) or adds favorites (press and hold)
8 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control2 using a single-finger swipe, for example: # To enter a character: select a character
using the keyboard and press on Touch Con trol2.
# To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control2.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
Using the touchscreen
1 Fingerprint sensor 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or
off 3 Switches the mute function on/off 4 To adjust the volume
Press orq or swipe over the button
282 MBUX multimedia system
# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
# To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin gers.
# To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
# To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.
# To turn the digital map: turn counter-clock wise or clockwise using two fingers.
# To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.
# To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown.
# To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an application.
# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.
# To call up a global menu in the applica tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears.
Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant
Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational approx imately half a minute after switching on the igni tion and can be operated from all seats. Further
information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to oper ate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Radio, media, TV R Vehicle functions R Online functions
Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control .
Conducting a dialog
Starting a dialog # Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX
Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system.
or
MBUX multimedia system 283
# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialog can be started.
For the dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice com mand, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?".
Calling up help # For information about the MBUX Voice
Assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?"
# Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the Operator's Manual". The full extent of the Digital Operator's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary.
Operating functions (examples) # To operate the navigation: "Search for an
Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South London."
# To operate the phone: "Call my father."
# To change the system language to Eng lish (short command): "Change language to English".
# To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations."
# To operate media: "Switch on random play- back."
# To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2."
# To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?"
# To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?"
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
& WARNING Risk of injury from the cam era's laser radiation
This product uses a classification 1 laser sys tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing.
# Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified spe cialist workshop.
This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. % The camera records image data for the appli
cations, for example body, head and hand detection. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. The MBUX Interior Assistant is automatically activated whenever the engine is started. You can set the functions individually or switch the Interior Assistant on or off.
284 MBUX multimedia system
The most recently active settings are stored in your user profile. If you switch off the Inte rior Assistant, for example, this setting will be adopted in your user profile. However you do not change any other active user profile in which the Interior Assistant is switched on.
The MBUX Interior Assistant detects the pres ence of the front vehicle occupants using a 3D laser camera. The Assistant interprets natural hand, head and body movements contextually or upon the explicit request of the vehicle occu pants. The Assistant can thus automatically trig ger vehicle interior functions and assist appropri ately to the situation. The Assistant recognizes driver and front passenger interactions.
Cameras1 are located in the overhead control panel. The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels: R INTELLIGENT
The Assistant recognizes vehicle occupants automatically and activates functions. R REACTIVE
The Assistant recognizes the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation. R CONTACTLESS
The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand movement or pose.
The Assistant offers functions for the following: R SAFETY
The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems. R COMFORT
The Assistant enhances comfort by automat ing functions inside the vehicle and support ing natural interaction with the vehicle. R INFOTAINMENT
Operating options or information are high lighted and/or shown on the central display as your hand approaches. The vehicle occu pants can carry out a favorite function with a hand pose.
System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The error messages are shown in the central dis play.
MBUX multimedia system 285
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel
may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off tempora rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again. The Interior Assistant is temporarily unavaila- ble. You will be informed as soon as the func- tion is available again. message appears. You receive a message when the camera is available again. R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or
scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera cover. The Interior Assistant is temporarily unavaila- ble. Please refer to the Operator's Manual message appears.
Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro fiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing
being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, color of cloth ing) or objects carried on a person, for exam ple a watch with a large face, are affecting the camera view. Or the detection range of the camera is restricted. The Availability of the Interior Assistant is limited for the driver. Please see the Opera- tor's Manual message appears. Keep the camera's field of vision clear. R The camera is not operational.
The Interior Assistant unavailable. Please visit a workshop. message appears. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter.
Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive)
Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind
Spot Assist with exit warning. R Active Blind Spot Assist is activated
(/ page 250). R The vehicle is equipped with active ambient
lighting or ambient lighting.
% Observe the information on the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 247).
The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle. As soon as the driver or front passenger moves their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehicle equipment, the following warnings are issued: R The active ambient lighting or ambient light
ing flashes red. R The warning lamp in the outside mirror
flashes red.
286 MBUX multimedia system
R When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds.
% The visual warning is thus already given before the door is opened.
% Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 247) and on ambient lighting (/ page 165).
Switching the reading light and search light and on or off
Requirements: R For the reading light: the driver's and front
passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rearview mirror. R For the search light: the function is availa
ble in the vehicle when it is dark. R The front passenger seat is not occupied or a
child is sitting in a child restraint system. R The hand movement is made by the driver in
the interaction area above the front passenger seat.
Switching the reading light on and off
Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger
# Move your hand up and down vertically under the inside review mirror. The reading light is switched on or off.
Switching the search light on and off
Interaction area for activating the search light
# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on automatically for the driver.
# To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.
MBUX multimedia system 287
Automatic preselection of the outside mirror (COMFORT/reactive)
Until now, to set the outside mirror the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door. With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natu ral movement of your head to the left or right. When the hand touches the button for adjusting the outside mirror, the LED under the button of the preselected mirror side lights up. Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror. % Preselection of the outside mirror using but
tons is still possible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors (/ page 171).
% The driver camera is also used for this appli cation.
Calling up favorites with the V pose (INFO TAINMENT/contactless)
Requirements: R At least one favorite has been saved in the
favorites list. R The favorite has been connected with the
MBUX Interior Assistant. R The area for detecting the favorites pose (V
pose) is above the center console in front of the central display. R The V pose is held for a brief time.
The V pose makes it easier to call up favorites. The front vehicle occupants can associate their own favorite with the V-pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a massage program for a seat. % If a favorite has not yet been saved and con
nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you.
Implementation of the V-pose above the storage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display
# Position your hand above the storage com partment of the center console at the height of the central display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so, your index and middle finger are spread to form a V.
288 MBUX multimedia system
With your other fingers bent inwards. Briefly hold the V pose. The favorite is called up.
Function of the driver camera
The driver camera is in the driver's display or in the 3D driver display. The driver camera detects the following charac teristics: R Head position R Viewing direction R Eyelid closure characteristics R Driver's face
% The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. The camera is activated automatically each time the engine is started.
The driver camera must be set up for face detec tion before use. Teaching-in biometric data (/ page 291).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or
scratched. R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. R The driver is wearing glasses that block infra
red.
Display messages In the following situations display messages may be shown: R The driver camera is inoperative.
The camera is faulty. The Driver Camera Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual message appears. R The driver camera cannot capture the posi
tion of your head.
The Change the steering wheel/ seat posi- tion until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. message appears. R The view of the driver camera is reduced or
restricted. The Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual message appears.
Notes on care Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 334).
Switching the driver camera on or off
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Intelligent Assistance # Select On or Off. When the driver camera is switched off, the fol lowing functions are not available or limited: R The 3D driver display R The MBUX augmented reality Head-up Dis
play (/ page 275)
MBUX multimedia system 289
R The microsleep detection of ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 221) R The facial recognition
This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user pro file and protected applications (/ page 291). R Multimodality
This function activates the MBUX Voice Assistant with eye control, e.g. for the confir mation of a display message by voice.
Information on users, suggestions and favor ites
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.
# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move ment.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen
tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a
seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop ped.
The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile.
User profiles and user-specific content Prerequisites for the vehicle owner: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R You have a Mercedes me PIN. R You have agreed to the terms of use.
User profiles save personal settings. If the vehi cle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users. You can individualize a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me app or in the Mercedes me Portal. User-specific content and applications with per sonal data are protected by different levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used.
290 MBUX multimedia system
% The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off.
% When a user profile is activated, the follow ing personalized comfort systems, for exam ple, can be adjusted or their settings loaded: R Seat R Ambient light R Outside mirrors R Blinds R Air conditioning adjustment
If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.
Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example: R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set
tings R Climate control R Ambient lighting R Radio (including station list)
R Suggestions and favorites
Suggestions The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation destinations, phone numbers and music prefer ences. The requirements for that are the selec tion of a user, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data.
Favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favorites are available in total.
Configuring users, suggestions and favorites
Requirements: R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta
tionary.
Multimedia system: 4 5f 5 Change User
Adding a user # Selectf Add User .
A QR code is loaded. # Scan the displayed QR code with the
Mercedes me app or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me app is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device.
# Follow the directions in the app. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. If only your user profile is available, it will be loaded automatically. If more than one user profile is available, you will be directed to the user selection. When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection.
MBUX multimedia system 291
Selecting user options # Select Settings. # To configure suggestions: select Sugges-
tion Settings. # Select Suggestions. # Switch the options on or off.
If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, suggestions based on your user behavior will be offered to you.
# For intelligent multimodality: select Multi- modality. If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis tant can be activated in certain situations.
# To switch the learning function off for 24 h: switch on Deactivate 24h Intelligent Learning.
# To delete cumulated suggestions: select Reset Suggestion History.
# Select Ja (Yes).
Protecting user-specific content and applica tions If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors must be taught in in the vehicle. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account. The following user-specific content and applica tions are protected, for example: R User selection and user profile settings R The teaching-in of biometric sensors R Suggestions
The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations, contacts and mes sages are protected. R ENERGIZING COACH
The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected. R Mercedes me connect store
The purchase of services is protected.
# Switch Protect Content on or off. # Switch Access Protection on or off. % When access protection is switched off, your
user profile can be accessed and changed from every vehicle seat.
% Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis.
Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data models are saved in the sen sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia sys tem. # Select Biometric Data. # Select Fingerprint Recognition, Facial Recog-
nition or Voice Recognition.
% If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.
# Select Configure.
292 MBUX multimedia system
# To use fingerprint: place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen . The finger is scanned. If the scanning proce dure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user pro file and protected applications with your fin ger print.
# To use face recognition: close the driver's door or fasten the driver's seat belt.
# Look at the driver display for about five sec onds. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan.
# To use voice recognition: speak the sen tence shown on the central display and fol low the instructions of the voice assistant. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with voice input.
% Avoid background or disturbing noises dur ing voice recognition.
# To delete biometric data: select Delete. # Select Ja (Yes).
Selecting a user % When you call up your driver profile, the driv
er's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Tap on the Tap Here to Cancel message
in the central display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons
in the driver's door. # Select Change User. # Select a user. # When requested to do so, authenticate with
the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biomet ric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated.
% If you select Continue Without Selecting a User, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded.
Adding favorites from categories # Select. # Select. # Selectr. # SelectW Create New Favorite. # Select the category. # Select a favorite.
Linking favorites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose # Select. # Select. # Selectr. # Select Driver or Passenger. # Select the category. # Select a favorite.
MBUX multimedia system 293
System settings Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make set tings in the following menus and control ele ments: R Display
- Display brightness R Control elements
- Keyboard language and handwriting rec ognition
- Touchpad sensitivity - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls - Haptic operation for the touchscreen R MBUX Voice Assistant R MBUX Interior Assistant R Sound
- Entertainment - Navigation and traffic announcements - Telephone - Voice amplification
R Connectivity - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R MBUX rear tablet child-proof lock R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R Updating software R System Reset
Overview of software updates
Important software updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available. If the Automatic Online Update option is active, software updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The software updates are available for downloading for a limi ted period of time.
Carrying out a software update: R You can start online software updates via the
communication module. R You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi
hotspot. R You can start map updates from an external
medium.
% To complete software updates via the com munication module, the vehicle must be con nected with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account.
% To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external Wi- Fi hotspot.
A software update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation R Installation of the downloaded software
update R Activation of the downloaded software
update.
294 MBUX multimedia system
% It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system after completion of a software update.
% While some software updates are being downloaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted.
% Some software updates require a safe vehi cle status for the installation to be comple ted. They may only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the ignition switched off.
% For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears in the central display after the ignition is switched off. Fol low the step-by-step instructions in the cen tral display to complete the installation.
Availability of the driver display and central display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display and driver display. You may receive the following display messages when an installation is run ning:
% The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed.
In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automati cally attempts to restore the previous version. If it is not possible to restore the previous ver sion, the display messages shown above appear every time the engine is started.
Failure of the central display If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several sys tems such as the rear view camera, PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer
available. Drive on carefully and consult a spe cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Failure of the driver display If the driver display fails or there is a malfunc tion, you may not recognize limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on care fully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately (/ page 487). Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes- benz.com.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements: R Wi-Fi is activated on the multimedia system
and the communication device to be connec ted. R The communication device to be connected
supports at least one of the types of connec tion described.
MBUX multimedia system 295
The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.
% Some functions may first need to be activa ted on the communication device being con nected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth # Select Wi-Fi.
The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on.
When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or
make it available as a hotspot for external devi ces. When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection. When Wi-Fi is switched off, no connection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet. % The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country. % The vehicle's data volume is used for data
connection via the multimedia system. Data volumes can be purchased via the Mercedes me Portal. The data tariff of the mobile communication device is used for the data connection via an external communication device.
Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot spot # Select MBUX Hotspot. # Select one of the following connection
options. Connecting using a QR code Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected.
Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions). # Scan the QR code shown.
The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using NFC # Activate NFC on the device to be connected. # Hold the device to be connected to the NFC
interface when the NFC symbol appears in the status line.
# Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting using a security key # Select the vehicle from the device to be con
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connec ted.
# Confirm the entry. Generating a new security key # Select the security key in the MBUX Hotspot
menu.
296 MBUX multimedia system
# Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated.
A connection will be established with the newly created security key. % When a new security key is generated, all
existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re- established, the new security key must be entered.
Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia system. The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Purchased Data Plan is used for the data connection. % This function is country-dependent. # Select the Set Up option in the Internet and
Bluetooth menu. # Select Connect to the Internet. # Select one of the following connection
options. Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
% The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions).
# Select Search for Internet access. # Select the network. # Log in to the Wi-Fi network. or # Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi
symbol in the Internet device manager. Setting up an Internet connection via Blue tooth
% The mobile phone must support the Blue tooth profile PAN (Personal Area Network).
# Select Search for Internet access. In the list displayed, all mobile phones already known to the multimedia system are shown. New devices can be set up using the phone application.
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth. or
# Select the mobile phone with the\ Blue tooth symbol in the Internet device man ager.
Navigation and traffic Notes on navigation
Route guidance with augmented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic tion or wrong interpretation of the dis play
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation. # Avoid extended observation of the cam
era image.
MBUX multimedia system 297
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi tional information
The additional information from the augmen ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation # Alternatively, activate the MBUX Voice Assis
tant (/ page 283). # Switch to navigation.
The map appears.
Navigation overview
Digital map
1 Navigation window Route guidance active: display for destina tion information, route list, lane recommen dations, for example
2 Status line, calls up Control Center 3 Searches for parking facilities in the vicinity
4 Selects the map orientation 5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or
arrow) 6 Navigation menu
Navigation menu
1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti nation entries
2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance is active)
3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off
4 Calls up Route, and Traffic menus
298 MBUX multimedia system
Showing the route overview, entering intermediate destinations, selecting alterna tive routes Displaying traffic incidents and local area reports
5 Makes settings for View, Messages & Acous- tic Signals and Route
% If the navigation menu is not shown, tap on the digital map.
% The options are not available in all countries.
Entering a destination
Requirements: R For online search: an Internet connection is
established. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the terms of use.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?
Example: entering a POI, address or contact 1 Input line with current entry 2 Search result 3 Selects destination input, displays further
destination inputs with double arrow 4 Deletes an entry
MBUX multimedia system 299
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
6 Deletes the last character entered 7 Hides the keypad 8 Switches to handwriting recognition 9 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant A Sets the written language B Switches to digits and special characters C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
# Enter the destination in1. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.
% Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provi ded by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.
% You can enter a destination as a 3 word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries.
# Hide the keyboard witha.
# Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated.
% Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 280).
Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance
1 Saves a destination as a favorite 2 Selects a parking space in the vicinity of the
destination 3 Calculates the route and starts route guid
ance
300 MBUX multimedia system
4 Calls up the route overview 5 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of
the destination
# To call up the detailed display with desti nation address: pull the bar above the symbol upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example rat ings, prices and weather information, is shown.
# To share a destination: select Share . This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.
Adding an intermediate destination to the existing route or starting a new route guid ance # Select Add .
The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins.
or
# Select Replace Route . The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route guidance begins.
Selecting a route type # SelectZ in the navigation menu
(/ page 298). # Select Route.
The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. The trailer mode can be used if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. Traffic announcements for the route are taken into account via Reroute Based on Trafficr.
% Trailer mode and online routes are not availa ble in all countries and for all vehicles.
Calculating alternative routes # SelectZ in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Activate Route Overview after Start.
Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
Selecting alternative routes % If Route Overview after Start has been
switched on and a route has been calcula ted, the function is available.
# Select in the navigation menu. # Select Alternative Routes. # When the alternative routes have been calcu
lated, display the route in the navigation win dow by swiping to the right or left.
# Select Start.
Activating a commuter route % A user profile has been created and Allow
Destination Suggestions has been activated in the user options (/ page 291). Route guidance is not active.
# SelectZ in the navigation menu. # Select Route. # Activate Activate Commuter Route.
The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route.
MBUX multimedia system 301
For the daily commuter route, traffic inci dents on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance.
# To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or.
Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. high ways or ferries # SelectZ in the navigation menu. # Select Route. # Select Avoid Options. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality # Tap on in the map.
The indicator lamp lights up blue. The video image of the augmented reality camera is shown on the central display before a turning maneuver. The video image includes additional information.
# To return to the navigation map: tap on again. The indicator lamp is not lit.
Showing property information for route guid ance with augmented reality Road guidance with augmented reality is activa ted. # SelectZ in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers.
During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image.
Using map functions
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation
Increasing map scale # When the map is shown, tap twice quickly
with one finger on the central display.
Decreasing map scale # When the map is displayed, tap the central
display with two fingers.
Moving the map # When the map is displayed, swipe in any
direction with one finger on the central dis play.
# To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select\ Center .
Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol
on the map. The map orientations changes in this order: R The 3D map view is aligned to the direc
tion of travel. R The 2D map view is aligned to the direc
tion of travel. R The 2D map view is displayed so that
north is always at the top. R The map shows the complete route.
Using services
Requirements: R There is an Internet connection.
302 MBUX multimedia system
R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation
Showing traffic information # SelectZ in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Map Symbols.
# Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing Traffic. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning mes sages, are shown on the route. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.
Displaying hazard warnings If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents option. # Set the option usingZ.
If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning.
The following hazards may be shown on the map: R Accidents and breakdowns R Fog and ice R Hazards reported manually
R Vehicle with active hazard warning light R Mobile roadworks
Displaying online map contents # SelectZ in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols or gas sta tion prices.
MBUX multimedia system 303
Telephone Telephony
Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com
munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.
# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can
not be thrown around in such situa tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.
304 MBUX multimedia system
Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 133) Bluetooth connection The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth profile of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol lowing Bluetooth profiles, the full range of fea tures is available: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Profile) - The mobile phone message functions can
be used on the multimedia system. R HFP (hands-free profile)
- Wireless telephony is available on the multimedia system.
R SAP (SIM Access Profile)
- The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior antenna.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio functional ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man ufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception
station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged
into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
MBUX multimedia system 305
Telephone menu overview
1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5 Options 6 Messages 7 Calls up my devices 8 Numerical pad 9 Starts contact search
Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime
dia system via Bluetooth. R Two mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi
media system with both mobile phones.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia
system.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5Z 5 Devices 5 My Devices
Searching for a mobile phone # Select Connect New Device.
Connecting a mobile phone # Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.
306 MBUX multimedia system
Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:
- R Accept a call - k End Call - Answering a call with a message - i Conference - Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.:
- Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Deleting favorites R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:
- Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message
Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv ices. You can use the following services via the multi media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me
button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto
matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 309).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 309). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 314). Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Information on Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer
gency call system (/ page 314)
MBUX multimedia system 307
If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management. Forward ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on
location and/or the towing away of the vehi cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after auto
matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 310) In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect
service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be
clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys tem.
More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con
trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services
You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.
308 MBUX multimedia system
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)
Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button1.
Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button2, press it
briefly. # Press and hold SOS button3 for at least
one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 309). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general
information about the vehicle
You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 311).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system
Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover
age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that
vehicle data can be transferred automati cally.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5
# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the central display.
MBUX multimedia system 309
Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or
breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.
# Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes
me connect service "Accident and Break down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 307). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
takes your call and organizes the break down and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,
an automatic emergency call can be initi ated. This has priority over all other active calls.
% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with
Call Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select
Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Cus
310 MBUX multimedia system
tomer Center takes your preferred appoint ment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint ment and if necessary consult about the details.
% If you select Call Later after the service mes sage appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup
ported by the mobile phone network pro vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi
cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission
technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv
ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys
tem.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication
platform installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data
If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location
Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
MBUX multimedia system 311
and, if required to process the incident, forwar ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in
every country.
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu
When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes
me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Apps in the mul timedia system.
In the Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes
me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes
me user account and the vehicle R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the
web browser depending on availability
Web browser overview
1 Search 2 To refresh/stop 3 Previous website 4 Options 5 Settings
312 MBUX multimedia system
% Under you have the following options: R Bookmarks R Load mobile website
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.
Overview of smartphone integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue tooth with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte gration is only possible with an Internet connec tion. The appropriate application must be down loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable.
Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the
function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con trol box) R Apple CarPlay (wireless connection via
Bluetooth also possible) R Android Auto (wireless connection via Blue
tooth also possible)
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Mercedes-Benz Link, Apple CarPlay or Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta tionary and the parking brake is applied.
You can start Smartphone Integration using the My Devices menu. You can end Smartphone Integration via the My Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connection via the device manager or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)
The transfer of this data is used to optimize com munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi media system is reset . The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
MBUX multimedia system 313
R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction
This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system
Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall
in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net work coverage from the wireless service provid ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes- Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol lows (/ page 316). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made.
% eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 315) or manually (/ page 315). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue.
314 MBUX multimedia system
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit uation.
Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emergency call
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system trig gers an emergency call automatically in the fol lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident. R After an automatically initiated emergency
stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist.
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer gency call
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 309).
or # To use voice control: use the voice com
mands of the MBUX Voice Assistant. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
MBUX multimedia system 315
connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
If no connection can be made to the emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display. # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress the button for several sec onds.
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system
In the event of an automatic or manual emer gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data
R GPS position data on the route (a few 300 feet (100 meters) before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR- MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels.
For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be called up. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established
316 MBUX multimedia system
Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu
Symbol Designation Function
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.
8 Rest Select to pause the playback.
: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.
9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.
/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
Additional options Select to show additional options.
5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).
Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
MBUX multimedia system 317
Symbol Designation Function
Z Settings Select to make settings.
Home Select to return to the home screen.
j Messaging Select to call up messaging.
2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.
The following functions and settings are availa ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth) R Playing back audio or video files
318 MBUX multimedia system
Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu
Symbol Designation Function
Home Select to return to the home screen.
j Messaging Select to call up messaging.
/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
Z Settings Select to have further options shown. The setting options are country-dependent.
HD HD radio Select to switch the HD Radio function on or off. This function is not available in all countries.
4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.
Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.
MBUX multimedia system 319
Symbol Designation Function
Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account
Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur rently set as a favorite.
6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.
4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.
Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel
lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
320 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Designation Function
Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels
with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport
alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam
lessly
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.
8 Rest Select to pause the playback.
Depending on the frequency band selected, dif ferent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.
Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements: R There is a user account at https://
www.mercedes.me. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me
user account. R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the
Mercedes me portal.
R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis
sion free of interference.
% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
MBUX multimedia system 321
% The functions and services are country- dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.
Setting up satellite radio
Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider
has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas
ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z
# Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub scription status.
# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten minutes.
% You can also have the satellite service acti vated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Music and sport alerts
Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z 5 Alerts
Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of
matches in the live program.
Activating messages for a category # Select a category and activateD.
Adding messages for a category # Select a category and add a messageW. # Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dia
log window. The message is set for the activated O track and artist. If a match is found, a prompt
322 MBUX multimedia system
appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.
Deleting messages in a category # Select a category, mark the desired mes
sages and deleteE. or # Do not mark any messages and delete all
entriesE.
Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Standard sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume:
- Automatic adjustment
Burmester 3D-surround sound system and Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:
- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester high-end 4D surround
sound system) R Sound profiles R Volume:
- Automatic adjustment
MBUX multimedia system 323
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long
periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying the service due date
Driver display: 4 Service The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the driver display (/ page 273).
Information on regular maintenance work
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Adhere to the prescribed service inter
vals.
# Always have the prescribed mainte nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi
ate stops R mainly short-distance driving R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
324 Maintenance and care
R when the engine is often left idling for long periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display the service due date on the driver
display and note it down before disconnect ing the battery (/ page 324).
Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the hood unlocked
The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood
is locked.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood
The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there
is a person in the hood's range of move ment.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot
gases. R You could come into contact with other
hot, escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off.
Maintenance and care 325
Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never reach into the danger zone sur
rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition
system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
Opening the hood
# Pull on handle1 twice. The hood will be released and open slightly.
# Then lift the hood by hand.
326 Maintenance and care
Closing the hood
* NOTE Damage to the hood
If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk of dents. # Do not close the hood manually.
# Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.
# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level with the driver display
Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed.
The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. Driver display: 4 Service The engine oil level is shown. One of the following messages will appear on the driver display: R Engine Oil Level Measuring Now: measure
ment of the oil level is not yet possible.
# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the driver display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.
R Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver display is yellow and is below "min":
# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
R Engine Oil Level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver dis play is yellow and is above "max":
# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch On Ignition # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil
level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil
level sensor is defective or not connected.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level Currently Unavailable # Close the hood.
Refilling engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
Maintenance and care 327
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor
oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
# Do not use additives.
* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
% Depending on driving style, the vehicle con sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
% Depending on the engine, the cap may be installed in the engine compartment in dif ferent locations.
# Turn cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
# Add engine oil. # Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 327).
328 Maintenance and care
Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres
sure.
# Only have the coolant checked or refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refilling the windshield washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
# Remove cap1 by the tab. # Refill washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield
washer fluid (/ page 474)
Maintenance and care 329
Keeping the air-water duct free
# Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.
Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti
vated. R the HOLD function is switched off. R the surround view camera or the rear view
camera is switched off. R the vehicle is locked and the door handles
retracted. R the side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed. R the blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off. R the windshield wiper switch is in positiong. R the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
20 ft (6 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise,
330 Maintenance and care
the trunk lid or a door could open uninten tionally. R for car washes with a conveyor system:
- neutrali is engaged. - the vehicle is locked from inside. R do not make any hand movements in the
area of the overhead control panel or deacti vate (/ page 294) the Sliding Sunroof and Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant.
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Notes on using a power washer
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.
Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-
spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a power washer: R the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid or a door could open uninten tionally. R maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in
(30 cm) to the vehicle. R vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140F (60C).
R observe the information on the correct dis tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper ating instructions. R do not direct the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sour ces and ventilation slits.
Washing the vehicle by hand
* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
Maintenance and care 331
# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 333).
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care
Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driver assistance systems.
Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp
cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matte finish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate
rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the
latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final
hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish
ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function
(/ page 215).
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint work care" (/ page 332). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.
Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora
tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
afterwards.
332 Maintenance and care
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils
are impaired by: - Sunlight - Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.
Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative
foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on care of vehicle parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi cle parts:
Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and
brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few
Maintenance and care 333
minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-
based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind shield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not avail able (/ page 215).
Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 168). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the
wiper blades with a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear
bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 215). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini
mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 261). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the
camera lens. R Do not use a power washer.
Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended
for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod
ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol lowing notes on cleaning and care:
334 Maintenance and care
Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176F
(80C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents.
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate
rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sun cream to come in contact with the plas tic trim.
Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth.
R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen
ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,
polishes or waxes.
Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA
* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too
damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences.
Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too
damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Maintenance and care 335
Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1%
soapy water and allow to dry.
EASY-PACK trunk box R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gaso
line or abrasive cleaning agents.
336 Maintenance and care
Emergency Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in storage spaces in the front door.
# Take the safety vest bag out of storage space 1.
# Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest.
% Safety vests can also be stored in the rear door storage spaces.
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 This is a class 2 vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled in the following cases: R The safety vest is the correct size R The safety vest is fully closed whilst being
worn
Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirt on
the reflective strips can no longer be removed R The maximum number of washes is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded
Breakdown assistance 337
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.
# Remove warning triangle2.
Setting up the warning triangle
# Fold side reflectors1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud2.
# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (soft sided)
First-aid kit (soft sided)1 is located on the right-hand side of the trunk and is secured with Velcro strip2.
Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
338 Breakdown assistance
Alternatively, consult a qualified spe cialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos
sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 339). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 340). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you
can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 309).
R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 380).
% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum
speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise
R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls
# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special ist workshop with regard to their further use.
# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure monitor ing system.
Breakdown assistance 339
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance pos sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has been punctured and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the stor age bag for the TIREFIT kit is located in the cargo compartment or on the left side of the stowage net. Comply with the loading guidelines (/ page 133).
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres
sor (/ page 340) R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)
You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 F (-20 C).
& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant
The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are large cuts or punctures in the
tire (larger than damage previously men tioned) R The wheel rims have been damaged R After journeys with very low tire pressure
or with flat tires
# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children.
340 Breakdown assistance
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.
# If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
# Change out of any clothes contamina ted with tire sealant immediately.
# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a quali fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tire.
# Affix part1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
# Affix part2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.
# Pull plug6 with the cable and hose5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
# Push the plug of hose5 into flange4 of tire sealant bottle3 until the plug engages.
# Place tire sealant bottle3 head downwards into recess2 of the tire inflation compres sor.
Breakdown assistance 341
# Remove the valve cap from valve7 on the faulty tire.
# Screw filling hose8 onto valve7. # Insert plug6 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle. # Switch on the ignition. # Switch on the tire inflation compressor using
On/Off switch1. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres sor during this phase!
# Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
# Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained
If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
342 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).
* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla tion compressor.
# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained
If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal ant cannot repair the tire in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.
# To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
Breakdown assistance 343
# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button1 next to manometer2.
# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.
# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot tle.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on.
# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 217) R Further information on ESP (/ page 218)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- ion battery
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery.
344 Breakdown assistance
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor
oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
All vehicles
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Breakdown assistance 345
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat
tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.
Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage
When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage
When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting
There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con necting and disconnecting the battery.
# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.
# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jumper cable.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.
346 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila
tion. # Do not lean over a battery.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg
ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc
tions before charging the battery.
Breakdown assistance 347
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided
using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: jump-
start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Preparing starting assistance/the charging process # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric
parking brake. # Select transmission positionj. # Switch off the ignition and all electrical con
sumers. # Open the hood.
# Open cover1. # Slide protective cover2 of positive contact 3 on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.
Starting assistance
# Connect the positive contacts of the vehicles with the jumper cable. Start with your own vehicle first.
# Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
# Connect negative terminal4 of the donor battery to the ground point of your vehicle
348 Breakdown assistance
using the jumper cable. Start with the donor vehicle first.
# Start the engine of your own vehicle. # Let the engines run for several minutes. # Before disconnecting the jumper cables,
switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or the lighting.
When starting assistance has finished: # First remove the jumper cable from the
ground point of your own vehicle and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then remove the jumper cable from the positive contacts of both vehicles. Always start with your own vehicle first.
# Close protective cover2 of positive contact 3 and close cover1.
Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.
Charging the 12 V battery # Connect the positive contacts of the vehicle
and the charger with the charging cable. Start with the vehicle first.
# Connect the negative contact of the charger and ground point4 on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger first.
# Start the charging process.
When the charging process is complete: # Remove the charging cable from ground
point4 on the vehicle and the negative con tact of the charger first and then from the positive contacts on the vehicle and charger. Always start with the vehicle first.
# Close protective cover2 of positive contact 3 and close cover1.
Replacing the 12 V battery
# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 344).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent
hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con
nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
Breakdown assistance 349
R Make sure that detachable parts are recon nected in the same way.
Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems (/ page 272).
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised
No
Rear axle raised
Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock
4MATIC vehicles
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised
No
Rear axle raised
No
350 Breakdown assistance
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 350).
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.
When the battery is discharged, the following actions cannot be performed: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be
released or applied R The automatic transmission cannot be shif
ted to positioni orj
% If the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni or the driver's display in the instrument cluster does not show any thing, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 352). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permis sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other wise the following could occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even rollover.
# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 466).
# Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j.
# Install the towing eye (/ page 353). # Fasten the tow bar.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mecha nism .
Breakdown assistance 351
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm
(/ page 103). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist
(/ page 240). # Shift the automatic transmission to position
i. # Release the electric parking brake.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys
tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.
# Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle away.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 351).
# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
# Shift the automatic transmission to position i.
% The automatic transmission may be locked in positionj in the event of damage to the
electrics. To shift toi, provide the on- board electrical system with power (/ page 348).
# Raise the vehicle in order to achieve greater ground clearance (/ page 254).
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Shift the automatic transmission to position
j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
4MATIC vehicles
352 Breakdown assistance
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle.
Towing eye storage location
Towing eye1 is located under the trunk floor.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the towing eye may be located at another position in the trunk.
Installing the towing eye
# Press the mark on cover1 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
# Make sure that cover1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow-starting
Tow-starting the vehicle can damage the automatic transmission. # Do not tow-start the vehicle.
# Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Breakdown assistance 353
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci
fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle docu ment wallet.
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in the following fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side (/ page 354) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(/ page 356) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 357) R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side
of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 357)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment
Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 354). R Have the following tools readily available:
- A dry cloth
354 Breakdown assistance
- A screwdriver with an appropriate head
Opening % Depending on the vehicle equipment, access
to the fuse box may be limited. Mercedes- Benz recommends consulting a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
# Release the rotary catches on cover1 and pull the cover up and out.
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an electrical component2 on the fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw3 and put the component to the side without disconnecting the electrical connection.
# If present, release hoses4 from the retain ing clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.
Breakdown assistance 355
# If present, release hoses5 from the retain ing clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.
# Unscrew screws6 and fold out bar7.
# Unscrew screws8 and remove fuse box lid 9 to the side.
Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor
rectly in lid9. # Place lid9 on the fuse box and tighten
screws8. # Fold back bar7 and tighten screws6.
# If present, engage hoses5 in the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.
# If present, engage hoses4 in the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.
# If present, insert electrical component2 into the holder on the fuse box lid and tighten screws3.
# Insert cover1 and engage the rotary catches.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit
Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 354).
356 Breakdown assistance
# Open cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell
Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 354).
# Open cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk
Requirements: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 354).
# Fold cover1 down in the direction of the arrow.
Breakdown assistance 357
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of injury through dam aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires:in (4 mm)
# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off- road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 360).
R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).
Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx imately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
358 Wheels and tires
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect mounting of snow chains
If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front
wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear
wheels in pairs.
* NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains
If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear
wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do
not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains
are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level (/ page 254). R Vehicles with rear axle steering: If snow
chains are installed, only drive with snow chain mode active (/ page 359).
% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 219). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Activating or deactivating snow chain mode Multimedia system: 4 5 5y
# Activate or deactivate Snow Chain Mode.
When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were mounted. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited. Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active.
Wheels and tires 359
Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tire pressure
Tires with either too low or too high a pres sure present the following hazards: R the tires could burst R the tires could wear excessively and/or
unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as
steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired
# Observe the recommended tire pres sures and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel: R monthly R if altering the load on the vehicle R prior to long journeys R if the operating conditions change, for
example when driving off-road
# Adjust the tire pressure where neces sary.
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire faults as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear
R Increased fuel consumption
& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.
Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage
360 Wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea ted pressure drop in the tires
The wheels, valves or tires could be dam aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture
or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 365). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (/ page 361).
Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 371).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: You can also see the tire pressure in the driver display. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example
data.
Wheels and tires 361
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 372). R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 365) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 371)
Checking the tire pressure manually
# Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.
# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.
# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom
mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.
# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
362 Wheels and tires
R Tire pressure table (/ page 361) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 365)
Tire pressure monitoring system
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem
& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor rect tire pressure
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and then inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for these tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately a minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea sons, including the installation of incompati ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear on the driver display (/ page 364).
Wheels and tires 363
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 524) or the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 546). The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 364).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tire, for example R There is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres sure monitoring system
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Driver display: 4 5 Service One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure of each wheel:
R Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes. R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete.
The tire pressures are already being moni tored.
# Compare the tire pressure with the recom mended tire pressure for the current operat ing condition (/ page 361). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 360).
% The values displayed in the driver display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high ele vations, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the driver display. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys tem
Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 360).
364 Wheels and tires
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
Driver display: 4 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm witha.
The driver display shows the Use current pressures as new reference values? mes sage.
# Select Yes and confirm the restart with a. The driver display shows the Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellowh warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac ard
& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the
permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding
the maximum load.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
Wheels and tires 365
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.
R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. R Recommended tire pressure1 for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 466). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres
sure table (/ page 361).
Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load
(/ page 366) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360).
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
# (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five occupants 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa
366 Wheels and tires
ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula ted in step 4.
# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Even if you have calculated the total load care fully, you should still make sure that the maxi mum permissible gross weight and the maxi
mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi cle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle including driver,
occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max
imum load (/ page 367) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 365) R Tire pressure table (/ page 361)
R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 466)
Calculation example for determining the maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 365). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Wheels and tires 367
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)
5 1
Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3
Front: 1
Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)
368 Wheels and tires
Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (/ page 369)
2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number (/ page 370)
3 Maximum tire load (/ page 371) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 371)
5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 372) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 372) 8 Tire name
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
Tire Quality Grading
In accordance with the US Department of Trans portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per formance factors:
1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times
Wheels and tires 369
as well on the government course as a tire gra ded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction grade
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin
# Avoid wheelspin.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance.
Temperature grade
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres
sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the
tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.
370 Wheels and tires
% The data shown in the image is example data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu
facturer identification code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 377).
R Tire size: identifier3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv er's side (/ page 365).
Specifications for maximum tire pressure
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
Wheels and tires 371
Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 361).
Information on tire characteristics
% The data shown in the image is example data.
This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
372 Wheels and tires
First letter(s)1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu
facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 365) R Maximum tire load (/ page 371) R Load index
Speed rating7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.
% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Wheels and tires 373
Index Speed rating
ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes "ZR" and there
is no speed rating7, find out what the max imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear thei snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.
Load index8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein
forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire
R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure
Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber- coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT- marked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.
374 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac tory. The tire and information table contains the rec ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max imum permissible load and the maximum per missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load- bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if
Wheels and tires 375
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
376 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con trol systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed.
Wheels and tires 377
# Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles. # Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes
Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus ing permanent damage to the tire. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use
i M+S- tires.
Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP and adapt your
driving style accordingly. # Usei M+S tires at outside temper
atures of less than 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur
pose.
378 Wheels and tires
Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in
certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one
axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: All installed wheels must be equip ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45F (7C) use win
ter tires or all-season tires markedi M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). R Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not fea
ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 365) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 372) R Tire pressure table (/ page 361) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 386)
Notes on rotating wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes
Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen sions.
Wheels and tires 379
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the
tire
Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 380).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Required tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench
The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag1 on the trunk floor.
The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements: R The required tire-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire-
380 Wheels and tires
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position. # Shift the transmission to positionj. # Vehicles with level control system: Set the
normal vehicle level (/ page 254). # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
# Remove the hub cap if necessary (/ page 381).
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 381).
Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps
Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 380).
Aluminum hub cap
# To remove: position socket2 from the tire- change tool kit on hub cap1.
# Position wheel wrench3 on socket2. # Using wheel wrench3, turn hub cap1
counter-clockwise and remove it.
# To install: follow the instructions above in reverse order.
% Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 380). R The hub caps have been removed
(/ page 381).
Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and
holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface.
Wheels and tires 381
R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands and/or feet under
the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk
lid.
# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com pletely.
Position of jack support points
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
382 Wheels and tires
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.
# Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire- change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
# Position support2 of jack4 on jack sup port point1.
# Turn ratchet wrench3 clockwise until jack support2 sits completely on jack support point1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Continue to turn ratchet wrench3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 383).
Removing a wheel
Requirements: R The vehicle is raised.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.
Wheels and tires 383
# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com pletely.
# Remove the wheel.
Installing a new wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.
# Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 377).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 377).
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes- Benz and for the wheel in question.
* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.
384 Wheels and tires
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 385).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 384).
* NOTE Risk of trapping the jack
If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered. # Start the engine. This adapts the vehi
cle level. # Remove the jack from under the vehi
cle.
# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock wise.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 to the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor que checked immediately.
# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.
# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 364). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
Wheels and tires 385
Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions
The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.
# Do not switch off ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work
shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.
Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency
spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an
emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel
with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Use the wheel bolts that are included with
the emergency spare wheel. Specified tightening torque: 96 lb-ft (130 Nm)
% Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is
installed, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 365) R Tire pressure table (/ page 361) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 377)
386 Wheels and tires
Notes on technical data The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle electronics Two-way radios
Notes on installing two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor
rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna.
This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special ist workshop.
# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.
Technical data 387
1 Rear roof area
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the roof area is not per mitted. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table:
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output
2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz
10 W
Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output
70 cm frequency band 430 - 470 MHz
35 W
Two-way radio 2G
2 W
Two-way radio 3G/4G/5G
0.5 W
The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis
sion output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
388 Technical data
There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol lowing frequency bands: R TETRA R 2G/3G/4G/5G
Radio operating permits for vehicle compo nents
Overview of manufacturers
Manu factur er's abbrevi ated designa tion
Manufacturer information
ADC ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH, Peter-Dornier- Strae 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany
Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimler strae 6, 71229 Leonberg, Ger many
Manu factur er's abbrevi ated designa tion
Manufacturer information
Conti nental Antenna
Continental Advanced Antenna GmbH, Rmerring 1, 31137 Hilde sheim, Germany
Conti nental Automo tive
Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstrae 12, 93055 Regens burg, Germany
Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA
HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rix becker Strae 75, 59552 Lipp stadt, Germany
Manu factur er's abbrevi ated designa tion
Manufacturer information
Hirsch mann
Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH, Stuttgarter Strae 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Huf Bao long
Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewerbestrae 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany
HUF HUF Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Strae 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
KATHREI N
KATHREIN Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Rmerring 1, 31137 Hilde sheim, Germany
LEO POLD KOSTAL
LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11, 44227 Dortmund, Germany
Technical data 389
Manu factur er's abbrevi ated designa tion
Manufacturer information
MAR QUARDT
MARQUARDT GmbH, Schlostrae 16, 78604 Rietheim-Weilheim, Germany
Meta System
Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galim breti 5, 42124 Reggio Emilia, Italy
Pana sonic
Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch- Strae 27, 63225 Langen, Ger many
Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Tech nology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland, Uni ted Kingdom
Manu factur er's abbrevi ated designa tion
Manufacturer information
Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsv gen 22, 44737 Vrgrda, Sweden
WITTE- Velbert
WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr. 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Argentina
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
C-18005
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
C-17908
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
C-23776
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
C-21798
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
C-20030
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
H-23855
390 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
H-15475
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier)
H-24637
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
H-24376
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
H-17929
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
H-17845
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
H-15694
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
H-15695
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
H-20027
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
H-15541
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
H-11545
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
H-16874
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
H-17689
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
H-21034
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
H-21035
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
H-17598
Technical data 391
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
H-23101
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
H-24933
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
H-17213
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
H-17212
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
H-23166
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
H-23102
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
H-24936
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
H-4788
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
H-20495
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
H-20959
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
C-23670
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
C-23672
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
EXPENACOM 9967/2017
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
H-24664
392 Technical data
Australia
Manu fac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equipment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
Manu fac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equipment approval number
Schrad er
AG5SP4 (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
Schrad er
GG4T (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
Schrad er
DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
Bahamas
Man ufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Veon eer
77V12BS M (radar sensor)
FCC ID: WU877V12BSM
Veon eer
77V12CR N (radar sensor)
FCC ID: WU877V12CRN
Technical data 393
Belarus
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier)
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking sys tem)
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking sys tem)
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking sys tem)
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (lock ing system)
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (lock ing system)
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (lock ing system)
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (lock ing system)
394 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (lock ing system)
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (lock ing system)
Botswana
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
BOCRA/TA/ 2018/2026
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4582
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4975
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
BOCRA/TA/ 2017/3788
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
BOCRA/TA/ 2017/4387
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
BOCRA/TA/ 2017/5050
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/5075
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4661
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4662
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4724
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4723
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
No. 20233
Technical data 395
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4664
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4593
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4389
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4388
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4390
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/5135
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4758
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2020/5473
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4359
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4360
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (lock ing system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4687
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4759
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
No. 1967
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4975
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
BOCRA/TA/ 2019/4980
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
BOCRA/TA/ 20205342
396 Technical data
Brazil
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
06783-19-02496
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
06351-19-03745
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
3691-15-5298
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
00325-20-02149
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
03189-17-02856
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
04689-17-05364
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
1855-12-5762
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
1787-12-8058
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
03627-15-06643
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
00053-13-06643
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
01333-17-02930
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
01395-11-02930
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
01392-11-02930
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
00616-17-02930
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
06218-19-02930
Technical data 397
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
03149-19-02930
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
03756-15-02930
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
03757-15-02930
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
06468-19-12386
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
06352-19-12386
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NF C (locking system)
00616-17-02930
Brunei Darussalam
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 90000 DTA-004005
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-004222
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
DRQ-D- MAJU-02-2011-1 11083- LPD-31820
398 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
DRQ- DMAJU-02-2011- 11108 3- LPD-31504
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
DTA-000793
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-001661
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-004998
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005043
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
DRQ-D- MAJU-02-2011-1 11083- LPD-39004
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-000351
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-001661
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
DRQ- DMAJU-02-2011- 111083 DTA-000794
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
DTA No. 000310
Technical data 399
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
DTA No. 000311
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
DTA No. 003757
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-30012
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-006138
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
DRQ- DMAJU-02-2011- 111083- LPD-30419
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-8 916-LPD-38937
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-000068
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-000066
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-38890
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-003525
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005850
400 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-33567
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-8 916- LPD-33568
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (lock ing system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-003662
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
DRQ- DJATI-07-2000-1 09000 DTA-003524
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005843
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
DRQ-D-QAF AUTO-05-2003-1 089 4- LPD-29559 DRQDJATI-07-20 00-8916LPD-29 665
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
DTA-001514
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader MFR (control unit) (tire pres sure monitor sensor)
DTA No. 003893
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-004000
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-003999
Technical data 401
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-89 16-LPD-30870
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
DRQ-D- JATI-07-2000-10 9000 DTA-005628
Ghana
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
NCA APPROVED
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
1R3-1M-7E1-160
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
ZRO-1H-7E3-152
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
ZR0-M8-7E3-230
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X53
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
ZRO-M8-7E3-225
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-277
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
BR3-1M-GE2-16A
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
BR3-1M-GE2-157
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X45
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X47
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
EX6-6M-GE2-16C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X49
402 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X50
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X51
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
BR3-1M-GE-129
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
ZRO-1H-7E3-26E
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
SRO-1M-7E4-11B
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
ZRO-M8-7E3-272
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
SRO-1M-7E3-129
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
ZRO-1H-7E3-142
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
ZR0-M8-7E3-230
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
SRO-1M-7E4-X59
Indonesia
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
36010/SDPPI/ 2017 2130
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
38132/SDPPI/ 2017 2130
Technical data 403
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
68676/SDPPI/ 2020
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
40556/SDPPI/ 2018
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
34538/SDPPI/ 2017
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
53078/SDPPI/ 2017 PLG3612
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
67882/SDPPI/ 2020
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
404 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
41771/I/SDPPI/ 2018 5205
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
66185/ SDPPI/ 2020 10325
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
D-WMI2020A (control unit)
66678/ SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Technical data 405
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
66911/ SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
69379/SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
52221/SDPPI/ 2017 6051
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
29510/SDPPI/ 2016 3159
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
28238/SDPPI/ 2016 3159
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
52166/SDPPI/ 2017 3533
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
41618/SDPPI/ 2018 3533
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
26742/SDPPI/ 2015 3533
KATHREI N
RKE213E1 (locking sys tem)
41771/SDPPI/ 2018 5205
406 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
41121/SDPPI/ 2018 5125
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
67373/SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
59840/SDPPI/ 2019 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Technical data 407
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
59838/SDPPI/ 2019 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
67372/SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
64126/SDPPI/ 2019 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
408 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
69077/SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
40283/SDPPI/ 2018 2208
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
40282/SDPPI/ 2018 2208
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Technical data 409
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
62233/SDPPI/ 2019 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
54083/SDPPI/ 2017 PLG3612
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
38892/SDPPI/ 2018 3612
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
57058/SDPPI/ 2018 PLG3612
Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
25626/SDPPI/ 2015 PLG3612
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
40524/R/I/ SDPPI/2018
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
66830/SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
410 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
66792/SDPPI/ 2020 7163
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Pana sonic
DAIRSE 63550/SDPPI/ 2019
Dilarang melaku kan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbul kan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkun gan sekitarnya
Jamaica
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking system)
SMA CMKG1
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking system)
SMA - DC12A
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking system)
SMA - DC12B
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking system)
SMA - DC12K
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MS2
Technical data 411
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MS4
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MS5
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MK1
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MK2
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking system)
SMA - 3350.38
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MU1
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (lock ing sys tem)
SMA - MU2
Jordan
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor)
TRC/LPD/ 2014/126
ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor)
TRC/LPD/ 2014/248
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
T/ 4/11/11/6 676
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
T/ 4/11/11/6 645
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/ 2009/15
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2014/73
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2017/254
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
T/ 4/11/11/7 046
412 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier)
T/ 4/11/11/9 682
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking system)
T/ 4/11/11/1 799
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking system)
TRC/LPD/ 2017/183
Gentex EUROII (conveni ence system)
TRC/LPD/ 2014/258
Gentex MUAHL 5 (conveni ence system)
TRC/LPD/ 2015/299
HELLA DM4 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/6 459
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking system)
T/ 4/11/11/1 0883
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking system)
TRC/LPD/ 2012/53
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
TRC/LPD/ 2017/421
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2017/422
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (con trol unit) (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
TRC/LPD/ 2017/175
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)
T/ 4/11/11/4 355
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
TRC/LPD/ 2012/144
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking sys tem)
TRC/LPD/ 2015/102
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/1 899
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/1 0892
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/1 0891
Technical data 413
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/6 412
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking sys tem)
TRC/LPD/ 2019/127
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/3 509
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/1 1020
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/1 1021
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking system)
T/ 4/11/11/1 973
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/2 511
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking sys tem)
T/ 4/11/11/4 462
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2019/21
Schrader MFR (control unit) (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2019/184
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2017/456
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2018/139
Manufac turer
Model designation Radio equipment approval number
Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2011/158
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
T/ 4/11/11/5 557
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
T/ 4/11/11/5 556
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
TRC/LPD/ 2015/161
WITTE- Velbert
SGHTAG3NFC (locking system)
T/ 4/11/11/2 635
414 Technical data
Canada
Man ufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
IC: 4135A-ARS4C
Bosc h
FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
IC: 3887A-FR5CPCCF
Veon eer
77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
IC: 8436B-77V12BSM
Veon eer
77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
IC: 8436B-77V12CRN
Malaysia
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
SQASI/TA/ 19/2872
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
CIDF15000 490
Bosch LRR3 (radar sen sor)
RALM/35A /0716/ S(16-2324)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
RALM/66A /0618/ S(18-2468)
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
RALM/45A /0517/ S(17-1576)
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
RAUU/28C /0915/ S(15-2703)
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier)
RDDK/34B /1219/ S(19-5319)
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking system)
RFCP/13A /0220/ S(20-0197)
Technical data 415
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking system)
RAAU/51C /0417/ S(17-1034) CIDF15000 578
HELLA DM4 (locking sys tem)
RDDK/41A /0717/ S(17-2269) CIDF15000 578
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking system)
RAUU/63A /0311/ S(11-0432)
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking system)
RAUU/22C /0615/ S(15-1864)
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor)
CIDF17000 184
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
RAQP/57A /0817/ S(17-2424)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)
RAYN/25A /0715/ S(15-2385)
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
RAAU/16B /1112/ S(12-2053)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking sys tem)
RAUU/27C /0815/ S(15-2953)
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking system)
RDDK/33A /0317/ S(17-0669)
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking system)
RAUU/62A /0311/ S(11-0263)
416 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking system)
RAUU/62A /0311/ S(11-0264)
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking sys tem)
RDDK/31A /0217/ S(17-0405)
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking sys tem)
RDDK/25B /1019/ S(19-0943)
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking sys tem)
RGLO/02A /0720/ S(20-2580)
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking sys tem)
RAAU/14C /0615/ S(15-1057)
MAR QUARDT
MK2(locking sys tem)
RAAU/12C /0515/ S(15-1059)
MAR QUARDT
3350.38(locking system)
RDDK/17B /0819/ S(19-1082)
MAR QUARDT
MU2(locking sys tem)
RGLO/01A /0720/ S(20-2579)
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Meta Sys tem
ITS/TPS (interior motion sensor)
RAVG/18Q /0212/ S(11-2068)
Meta Sys tem
MUW II (interior motion sensor)
RAVG/17Q /0212/ S(11-2067)
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sensor)
RCDD/03A /0615/ S(19-2094)
Schrader MFR (control unit) (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
RAQP/62A /0419/S (19-1694)
Technical data 417
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
RALM/31 A/0316/ S(16-0727)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
SQASI/TA/ 19/2980
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
SQASI/TA/ 19/2982
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC(lock ing system)
RDDK/43B /0420/ S(20-1749)
Morocco
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
MR 9778 ANTR 2014-11-11
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
MR 20231 ANTR 2019
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
MR 20575 ANTR 2019
Bosch LRR3 (radar sen sor)
MR 5371 ANTR 2010-02-02
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
MR 9186 ANTR 2014-04-22
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
MR 13900 ANTR 2017-05-04
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna ampli fier)
MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli fier)
MR 21174 ANTR 2019-10-14
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking system)
MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05
418 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking system)
MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04
HELLA DM4 (locking sys tem)
MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking system)
MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking system)
MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure sensor) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
MR 14320 ANTR 2017-07-07
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (con trol unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
MR 14319 ANTR 2017-07-07
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26
HUF HUF14632 (lock ing system)
MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking sys tem)
MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking system)
MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking system)
MR 6698 ANTR 2011-11-16
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking system)
MR 6699 ANTR 2011-11-16
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking sys tem)
MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking sys tem)
MR 19199 ANTR 2019-03-25
Technical data 419
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking sys tem)
MR 23805 ANRT 22/04/2020
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking sys tem)
MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking sys tem)
MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking system)
MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12
MAR QUARDT
CMKG1 (locking system)
MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking sys tem)
MR 19200 ANTR 2019-03-25
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking sys tem)
MR 23804 ANRT 22/04/2020
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure sensor) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
MR 10216 ANTR 2015-03-18
Schrader MFR (control unit) (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
MR 19527 ANTR 2019-04-30
Schrader GG4T (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20
Manufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sensor)
MR 16355 ANTR 2018-04-19
Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sensor)
MR 6706 ANTR 2011-11-17
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
MR 10436 ANTR 2015
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
MR 20097 ANTR 2019
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
MR 20149 ANTR 2019
WITTE-Vel bert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
MR 23310 ANRT 10/03/2020
420 Technical data
Mexico
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-119 1
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RLVCOAR15-000 8
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RCPBOFR19-135 6
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-082 8
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-09 22
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-05 98
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
IFETEL: RLVKARK15-1741
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier)
IFETEL: RLVCORK19-217 4
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
IFETEL: RCPCOCM19-23 15
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-182 7
Gentex EURO II (con venience sys tem)
IFETEL: RCPJOHO07-598 -A9
Technical data 421
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience system)
IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-04 48
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-10
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RLVHI9211-0472
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RLVHI9212-0608
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-080 6
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RLVHUHU15-120 4
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RLVHUHU12-158 7
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVKOKK15-089 1
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
IFETEL: RLVMEDC17-034 8
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
IFETEL: RLVMADC11-044 6
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (inte rior motion sensor)
IFETEL: RLVMADC11-044 6
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVMAMS17-02 22
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVMAMS19-04 49
422 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVMEMS20-09 57
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-10 42
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-10 43
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RCPMA3319-053 0
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
IFETEL: RCPMAMU19-13 42
Meta Sys tem
ITS/TPS (inte rior motion sensor)
IFETEL: IFT/223/UCS/D G-AUSE/ 4871/2016
Meta Sys tem
MUW II (inte rior motion sensor)
IFETEL: IFT/223/UCS/D G-AUSE/ 5064/2016
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
IFETEL: RCPSCAG15-062 7
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader MFR (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
IFETEL: RLVSCMF15-095 9
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure mon itor sensor)
IFETEL: RLVSCGG17-166 5
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04
Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
IFETEL: RCPSCMR14-06 2
Technical data 423
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RLVAU7717-0744
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RLVVE7719-1063
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
IFETEL: RCPVE7719-099 8
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
IFETEL: RCPWISD20-094 3
Moldova
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A6632-19
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A6560-19
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A6227-18
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A5957-17
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A6004-18
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
MD OC TIP 024 A6500-19
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
MD OC TIP 024 A6648-19
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6671-20
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A5876-17
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
MD 0C TIP 024 A6761-20
424 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
MD OC TIP 024 A6652-20
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
MD OC TIP 024 A6514-19
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
MD OC TIP 024 A6449-19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6440-19
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6684-20
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6253-18
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6252-18
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6444-19
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6569-19
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
MO OC TIP 024 A6774-20
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6551-19
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6552-19
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
MD OC TIP 024 A6398-19
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6570-19
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6773-20
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A5678-16
Technical data 425
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A6508-19
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
MD OC TIP 024 A6506-19
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NF C (locking system)
MD OC TIP 024 A6753-20
Mongolia
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
A19000633
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
A18000328
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
A18000329
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
A19000400
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
A19000371
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
A19000372
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
A19000289
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
A19000516
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
A20000085
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
A19000374
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
A19000374
426 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (lock ing system)
A19000517
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (lock ing system)
A20000086
Niger
Manufac turer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
029/ ARCEP/DG/19
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
083/ ARCEP/DG/19
Manufac turer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
082/ ARCEP/DG/19
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
097/ ARCEP/DG/19
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
098/ ARCEP/DG/19
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
053/ ARCEP/DG/19
KATHREIN RKE213E1 (locking sys tem)
029/ ARCEP/DG/19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
037/ ARCEP/DG/19
Manufac turer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking sys tem)
010/ ARCEP/DG/19
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking sys tem)
008/ ARCEP/DG/19
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking sys tem)
009/ ARCEP/DG/19
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (lock ing system)
014/ ARCEP/DG/19
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (lock ing system)
HOMO-0096/ ARCEP/DG/2019
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (lock ing system)
034/ ARCEP/DG/19
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (lock ing system)
035/ ARCEP/DG/19
Technical data 427
Manufac turer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
015/ ARCEP/DG/19
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (lock ing system)
HOMO-0095/ ARCEP/DG/2019
Nigeria
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ AB00388/2015
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2062/2018
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3078/2019
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3282/2019
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2089/2018
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2042/2018
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0865/2015
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3372/2020
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3440/2020
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1670/2017
428 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1830/2017
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3100/2019
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3101/2019
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0829/2015
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2884/2019
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0823/2015
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1714/2017
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2627/2019
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2626/2019
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 1667/2017
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3212/2019
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3635/2020
Technical data 429
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0739/2015
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 0740/2015
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 2882/2019
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3069/2019
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
NCC/ TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ 3068/2019
Oman
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor)
TRA/TA- R/ 2016/14 D080134
ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor)
TRA/TA- R/ 2210/14 D080134
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
TRA/TA- R/ 7769/19 D172338
430 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
TRA/TA- R/ 7983/19 D172338
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRA/TA- R/ 1049/09
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor)
TRA/TA- R/ 1849/14
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
TRA/TA- R/ 4353/17
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
TRA/TA- R/ 2715/15 D090258
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier)
TRA/TA- R/ 8337/19
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
TRA/TA- R/ 8642/19 D172338
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (lock ing system)
TRA/TA- R/ 4158/17 D080134
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 4548/17 D080134
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking system)
TRA/TA- R/ 0210/11 D080353
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking system)
TRA/TA- R/ 0655/12 D080353
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pres sure monitor sensor)
TRA R/ 4516/17 D100428
Technical data 431
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (tire pres sure monitor sensor)
TRA R/ 4515/17 D100428
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
TRA R/ 7506/19 D100428
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)
TRA/TA- R/ 2665/15
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
TRA/TA- R/ 0920/12
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 3129/16
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking sys tem)
TRA/TA- RD/ 4056/17 D100428
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking sys tem)
TRA/TA- R/ 0227/11 D080353
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking sys tem)
TRA/TA- R/ 0228/11 D080353
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 4136/17 D080134
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 7316/19 D172249
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 9324/20 D100428
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 2848/15 D080353
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 2900/15 D080353
432 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
TRA/TA- R/ 7051/19 D172249
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 7353/19 D172249
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system) TRA/TA- R/ 9325/20 D100428
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pres sure monitor sensor)
TRA R/ 2380/15 D080134
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader MFR (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA R/ 7464/19 D090258
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA TA- R/ 4686/17 D080134
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pres sure monitor sensor)
TRA TA- R/ 5511/18 D172249
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
TRA/TA- R/ 2706/15
Manu facturer
Model designation Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
TRA R/ 7706/19 D172338
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
TRA R/ 7707/19 D172338
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (lock ing system)
TRA/TA- R/ 9150/20
Technical data 433
Pakistan
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor)
9.9014/2019
ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor)
9.1048/2018
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
9.9389/2019
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
9.198/2020
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continental Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
9.142/2016
Continental Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
9.100169/20 19
Continental Automotive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
9.100175/20 19
Continental Automotive
MARS Key less (locking system)
9.213/2017
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
9.409/2017
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys tem)
9.845/2013
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys tem)
9.846/2013
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
9.598/2015
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
9.790/2013
434 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
9.118/2016
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing system)
9.131/2017
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing system)
9.829/2013
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing system)
9.830/2013
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
9.133/2017
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
9.100171/20 19
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
9.486/2015
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
9.497/2015
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system)
9.100170/20 19
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen sor)
9.9284/2019
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
9.9391/2019
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
9.9391/2019
Technical data 435
Paraguay
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor)
2019-05-I-0271
ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor)
2019-07-I-0353
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
2019-11-I-0602
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
2019-09-I-0508
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sen sor)
2017-06-I-0000162
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor)
2019-05-I-000236
Conti nental Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
2016-02- I-0000038
Conti nental Antenna
RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier)
2019-12-I-0656
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Conti nental Automo tive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
2020-02-I-0110
Conti nental Automo tive
MARS Key less (locking system)
2017-05-I-0000136
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
2017-08- I_0000261
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
2016-5-I-000134 y 2011-06-I-0059
436 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
2017-04-I-0000119 y 2012-05-I-0096
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
2017-09- I-0000328
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
2020-06-I-0284 y 2015-08- I-0000226
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
2017-12- I-0000409 y 2012-10-I-0178
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
LEO POLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
2015-06-I-0000181
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
2017-07-I-0000199
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
2016-5-I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
2016-5-I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
2017-04-I-0000101
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
2019-10-I-0581
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
2020-07-I-0390 y 2015-07- I-0000200
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
2020-07-I-0391 y 2015-07-I-0000201
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
2019-04-I-000216
Technical data 437
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Pana sonic
DAIRSE Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaranes, Asun cin, Paraguay, (595 21) 569 7000, sac@con dor.com.py
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
2015-04-I-0000150
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen sor)
2015-07-I-000194
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
2019-07-I-0399
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
2019-07-I-0398
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NF C (locking system)
2020-06-I-0326
Philippines
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor)
ESD-1409466C
ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor)
ESD-1409834C
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
ESD-1920226C
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
ESD-1920531C
438 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor)
ESD-1408917C
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sen sor)
ESD-1716172C
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
ESD-1920160C
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
ESD-1920162C
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen sor)
ESD-1510921C
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
ESD-1510376C
Conti nental Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
ESD-1511856C
Conti nental Antenna
RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier)
ESD-1921015C
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Conti nental Automo tive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
ESD-2021556C
Conti nental Automo tive
MARS Key less (locking system)
ESD-1714865C
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
ESD-1715539C
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
ESD-1105246C
Technical data 439
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
ESD-1206044C
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
ESD-1715393C
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
ESD-1511236C
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
ESD-1206521C
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
LEO POLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
ESD-1510698C
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
ESD-1714489C
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
ESD-1105216C
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
ESD-1105215C
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
ESD-1715652C
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
ESD-1919133C
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
ESD-2022426C
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
ESD-1510644C
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
ESD-1510645C
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
ESD-1919198C
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
ESD-1919146C
440 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
ESD-2022425C
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NF C (locking system)
ESD-2022599C
Zambia
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Conti nental Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/11
Conti nental Automo tive
MARS Key less (locking system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/3
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/4
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/12
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/11
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2018/12/18
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/48
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/5/16
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/5/17
Technical data 441
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/5/18
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (lock ing system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2018/9/30
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (lock ing system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/123
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (lock ing system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/20
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (lock ing system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/21
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/3/6
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (lock ing system)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/7/124
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/6/59
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ 2019/6/60
Serbia
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
011 14
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
011 14
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
011 14 34540-328/19-3
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
01119 34540-400/19-0 4
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
1-06-3454-190/ 09
442 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
34540-840/17-3
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
P1617068100
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
005 18 P1618107600
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
005 19 P1619151300
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
005 20 P1620007300
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
005 17 P1617052600
Gentex EURO II (con venience sys tem)
005 14 P1614085200
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
005 20 P1620100100
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
005 18 P1618084500
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
005 18 P1618084400
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 17
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 17
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 19
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
005 18 P1618104600
Technical data 443
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
005 18 P1618156300
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
005 18 P1618080200
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
005 17 P1620044700
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
011 11
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
011 11
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
011 17
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
005 19 P1619129100
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
005 20 P1620062300
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
34540-306/18-3
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
34540-304/18-3
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
34540-124/19-5
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
005 19 P1619129200
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
005 20 P1620062200
Meta Sys tem
MUW II (inte rior motion sensor)
011 19 P1619045500
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 15
444 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader MFR (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 19
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 17
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
005 18
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
011 11
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
011 18 34540-483/18-3
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
34540-327/19-6
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
34540-325/19-5
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
005 20 P1620047900
Singapore
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
DA103365
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
DA103365
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
DA103365
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
N3368-19
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
N0380-15
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
N0871-19
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
N1699-17
Technical data 445
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
N2681-20 DA105282
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier)
N4939-19 DA107248
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
N4774-19 DA103365
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
N1298-17 DA103365
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
N3010-17 DA103365
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
N0812-11 DA103365
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
N1231-12 DA103365
HUF Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
DA103787
HUF Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
DA103787
HUF Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
DA28467
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
N1934-20 DA105282
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
N2797-12 DA103365
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
N2292-15 DA103365
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
N1138-17 DA103787
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
N0793-16 DA103365
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
N0726-16 DA103365
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
N1067-17 DA103787
446 Technical data
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
G2709-19 N2718-19 N2717-19 DA103787
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
G2147-20 N2151-20 DA103787
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
N2522-15 DA103365
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
N2523-15 DA103365
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (lock ing system)
N0506-19 DA103787
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
G2267-19 DA103365
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
G2148-20 DA103787
Meta Sys tem
ITS/TPS (inte rior motion sensor)
N2215-11
Meta Sys tem
MUW II (inte rior motion sensor)
N2216-11
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
DA105282
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
N2779-15 DA103365
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
DA103365
Manufac turer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
DA103365
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
N1755-20
South Africa
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
TA-2014/1637
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
TA-2014/1783
Technical data 447
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
TA-2019/1595
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
TA-2019/1200
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
TA-2014/212
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
TA-2017/2013
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
1965/007009/ 07
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
TA-2015/1438
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1 (antenna amplifier)
TA-2020/043
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
TA-2019/5405
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
TA-2016/3500
Gentex EURO II (con venience sys tem)
TA-2005/614
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience system)
TA-2015/1386
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
TA-2017/2518
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
TA-2011/374
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
TA-2013/1262
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
TA-2017/1393
448 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
TA-2017/1391
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
TA-2019/1440
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
TA-2015/1077
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
TA-2012/1543
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
TA-2015/595
Meta Sys tem
ITS Master (interior motion sensor)
TA-2011/1636
Meta Sys tem
ITS Sensor (interior motion sensor)
TA-2011/1227
Meta Sys tem
MUW II (inte rior motion sensor)
TA-2019/261
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
TA-2017/312
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
TA-2011/370
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
TA-2012/1542
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
TA-2016/3314
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
TA-2019/843
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
TA-2020/5765
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
TA-2015/179
Technical data 449
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
TA-2015/180
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (lock ing system)
TA-2018/3985
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
TA-2015/072
Schrader MFR (tire pres sure monitor sensor)
TA-2019/273
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
TA-2017/3884
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
TA-2017/2933
Schrader MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
TA-2011/1370
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
TA-2015/2087
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
TA-2019/1380
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
TA-2019/1382
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
TA-2020/055
450 Technical data
South Korea
Man ufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF146 32 (lock ing sys tem)
MSIP-CRM-HHF- HUF-14632
MAR QUA RDT
MU1 (locking system)
R-R-MQU-MU1
Thailand
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen sor)
A57013-19
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
A57008-19
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
A57006-15
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor)
A57005-14
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sen sor)
A57003-17
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Conti nental Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
SDoC
Conti nental Antenna
RKE223E1G NS (antenna amplifier)
SDoC
Conti nental Automo tive
CMKG1 (locking sys tem)
SDoC
Conti nental Automo tive
MARS Key less (locking system)
SDoC
Technical data 451
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
SDoC
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
SDoC
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
SDoC
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
SDoC
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
SDoC
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
LEO POLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
SDoC
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
SDoC A75004-20
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
SDoC
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
A75002-20
MAR QUARDT
MU2 (locking system)
A75005-20
452 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Meta System
MUW II (inte rior motion sensor)
RF test report: 149852-2R1TRFE MC EMC test report: 149852-1R1TRFE MC Safety report: 149852TRFSAF
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sen sor)
A57008-16
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
A57004-19
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
A57004-19
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NF C (locking system)
SDoC
Togo
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
No. 024/19
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
No. 040/19
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
No. 039/19
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking sys tem)
No. 089/19
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking sys tem)
No. 088/19
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem)
No. 041/19
Technical data 453
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
KATHREI N
RKE213E1 (locking sys tem)
No. 024/19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
No. 060/19
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking sys tem)
No. 055/19
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking sys tem)
No. 057/19
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking sys tem)
No. 056/19
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (lock ing system)
No. 008/19
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (lock ing system)
No. 101/19
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (lock ing system)
No. 021/19
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (lock ing system)
No. 022/19
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
No. 016/20
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (lock ing system)
No. 100/19
Ukraine
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
UA RF: 1CONT0004
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
UA RF: 1CONT0001
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
UA.TR.109.R. 0017-19
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
UA RF: 1BOSC0009
Bosch LRR3 (radar sen sor)
UA.TR.109.R. 0031-19
454 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
UA.TR.109.R. 0598-18
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
UA.TR.109.R. 0030-19
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
UKR. 355-123/19
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier)
UA.R.TR. 052.682-19
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking system)
UA1.001.021 175-20-TE
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking system)
RTS.UKR. 355-34/18
Gentex EURO II (conveni ence system)
UA1.001.008 806-15
HELLA DM4 (locking sys tem)
UA.TR.109.R. 0325-18
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking system)
UKR. 355-7/20
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking system)
UKR. 355-8/20
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor)
UA 1.001.01856 8-19-TE
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (con trol unit) (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
UA 1.001.01858 6-19-TE
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (con trol unit) (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
UA 1.001.01928 9-19-TE
HUF HUF14632 (lock ing system)
UKR. 355-113/19
Technical data 455
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
UA1.001.018 653-19-TE
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking sys tem)
1O094.0066 82-19
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking system)
UA.R.TR. 052.307-19
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking system)
UA.R.TR. 052.308-19
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking system)
UA.R.TR. 052.309-19
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking sys tem)
UA1.001.019 129-19-TE
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking sys tem)
UA.R.TR. 052.528-19
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking sys tem)
UA1.001.019 233-19-TE
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking sys tem)
UA1.001.019 234-19-TE
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking system)
UA1.001.018 888-19-TE
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
UA.TR. 028
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
UA RF: 1VEON2BS M
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
UA RF: 1VEON2CRN
456 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
TEC/ DoC No VEON EER.UKR. 355-3/19 NKRZi No- UA RF: 2VEONMRV 1
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
UA.R.TR. 052.120-20
Uzbekistan
Manu facturer
Model des ignation
Radio equipment approval number
HELLA DM4 (lock ing system)
UZ.SMT. 01.319.2581135
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (lock ing system)
UZ.SMT. 01.319.2550607
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (lock ing system)
UZ.SMT. 01.319.2581337
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (lock ing system)
UZ.SMT. 01.319.2581337
United Arab Emirates
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
TRA ER58296/17, DA40068
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
TRA ER61136/18, DA40068/15
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
TRA ER77062/19, DA40068
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
TRA ER74533/19, DA36758/14
Technical data 457
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Conti nental Antenn a
RKE213E1 (antenna ampli fier)
TRA ER64693/18, DA36975/14
Conti nental Antenn a
RKE223E1GNS (antenna ampli fier)
TRA E76442/19, DA65993/17
Conti nental Auto motive
CMKG1 (locking system)
TRA ER77964/20, DA0018994/0 9
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Conti nental Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking system)
TRA ER56005/15, DA44932/15
Gentex MUAHL 5 (conve nience system)
TRA ER41849/15, DA35176/14
HELLA DM4 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER56616/17, DA44932/15
Hirsch mann
920287A (locking system)
TRA ER52213/17, DA35219/14
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Hirsch mann
920287B (locking system)
TRA ER42011/5, DA35219/14
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA ER57806/17, DA36976/14
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (con trol unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA ER57807/17, DA36976/14
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (con trol unit) (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA ER7307/19, DA0086237/1 2
458 Technical data
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
HUF HUF14632 (lock ing system)
TRA ER63716/18, DA36976/14
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
TRA ER55496/17, DA36976/14
LEO POLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER62622/18
MAR QUARD T
DC12A (locking system)
TRA ER53465/17, DA0018994/0 9
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARD T
DC12B (locking system)
TRA ER0067828/11 , DA0018994/0 9
MAR QUARD T
DC12K (locking system)
TRA ER0067829/11 , DA0018994/0 9
MAR QUARD T
MS2 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER52668/17, DA0018994/0 9
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARD T
MS4 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER71616/19, DA0018994/0 9
MAR QUARD T
MS5 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER80720/20, DA0018994/0 9
MAR QUARD T
MK1 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER64145/18, DA0018994/0 9
Technical data 459
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARD T
MK2 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER64146/18, DA0018994/0 9
MAR QUARD T
3350.38 (locking system)
TRA ER69280/19, 0018994/09
MAR QUARD T
MU1 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER71833/19, DA0018994/0 9
MAR QUARD T
MU2 (locking sys tem)
TRA ER81329/20, DA0018994/0 9
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrad er
AG5SP4-D (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA ER37156/15, DA0047074/1 0
Schrad er
GG4T (tire pres sure monitor sen sor)
TRA ER57985/17, DA0047074/1 0
Schrad er
DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA ER960528/18, DA0047074/1 0
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrad er
MC34MA4 (tire pressure monitor sensor)
TRA ER37066/15, DA0047074/1 0
Veon eer
77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
TRA ER39759/15, DA0020858
Veon eer
77V12BSM (radar sensor)
ER72324/19
460 Technical data
Manu fac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equip ment approval number
Veon eer
77V12CRN (radar sensor)
ER72323/19
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
TRA ER79695/20, DA0018994/0 9
United States
Man ufac turer
Model designa tion
Radio equipment approval number
Bosc h
FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
FCC ID: NF3-FR5CPCCF
Veon eer
77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
FCC ID: WU877V12BSM
Vietnam
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen sor)
234/CVT-TT3
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
C0274151118AF0 4A2
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GN S (antenna amplifier)
C0007100120AF0 4A2
Technical data 461
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
CMKG1 (lock ing system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0001070120AF0 4A2
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Key less (locking system)
Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com pany Limited B0748240419AF0 4A2
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited B0625050419AF 04A2
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
C0112200717AF0 4A2
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (lock ing system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0048080319AF 04A2
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (lock ing system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0050080319AF 04A2
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (lock ing system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0049080319AF 04A2
462 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0035150219AF0 4A2
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0231240919AF0 4A2
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0141140520AF0 4A2
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0021180119AF0 4A2
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0022180119AF0 4A2
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (locking sys tem)
Suntech VietNam Technology Com pany Limited C0076150319AF0 4A2
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
C0002050119AF0 42A
Technical data 463
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Schrader GG4T (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
C0170191017AF0 4A2
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
C0078070518AF0 4A2
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sen sor)
A47/CVT-TT3
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen sor)
A48/CVT-TT3
Eurasian Economic Union
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
EAC N RU - DE.PA01.B. 87137/19
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
EAC N RU - DE.PA01.B. 77223/19
Continen tal Antenna
RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier)
Continen tal Antenna
RKE223E1GNS (antenna amplifier)
464 Technical data
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Continen tal Auto motive
MARS Keyless (locking sys tem)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Hirsch mann
920287A (lock ing system)
Hirsch mann
920287B (lock ing system)
Huf Bao long
TSSRE4A (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6 (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
Huf Bao long
TSSSG4G6b (tire pressure monitor sen sor)
HUF HUF4761 (lock ing system)
HUF HUF14632 (locking sys tem)
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
LEOPOLD KOSTAL
KK1 (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
DC12A (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
DC12B (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
DC12K (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
MS2 (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
MS4 (locking system)
Technical data 465
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
MAR QUARDT
MS5 (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
MK1 (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
MK2 (locking system)
MAR QUARDT
3350.38 (lock ing system)
MAR QUARDT
MU1 (locking system)
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pressure moni tor sensor)
Manu facturer
Model desig nation
Radio equip ment approval number
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
EAC N RU - US.M03.B. 00100/19
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
EAC N RU - US.M03.B. 00102/19
WITTE- Velbert
SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys tem)
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
Vehicle identification plate
466 Technical data
Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).
Never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
VIN in the engine compartment
1 VIN (vehicle identification number)
Technical data 467
Additional plates
1 Plate with information about emissions test ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California
2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con
tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.
# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.
# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
468 Technical data
Further information on approved operating flu ids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel
Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas oline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal
Technical data 469
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 205). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with premium-grade unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at least 87 AKI/91 RON.
* NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline with 87 AKI/ 91 RON: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and top up as soon as possible with unleaded pre mium grade gasoline.
# Do not drive at the maximum speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3000 rpm.
This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower octane number. Further information on fuel is available at the fol lowing locations: R At a gas station
R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes- Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi cated on the tank.
470 Technical data
Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a diesel engine
General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using gasoline in diesel
engines. # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter
# Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulfur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulfur diesel fuel with a sulfur content less than 50 ppm.
Vehicle without diesel particulate filter: # Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sul
fur content less than 500 ppm. # Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Gasoline R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable
oil R Paraffin or kerosene
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel:
# Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The recommended fuel grade for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 205).
Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. Keep the fuel level low for the first refueling with winter diesel fuel, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refueling. Further information on fuel is available at the fol lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Technical data 471
Tank content and reserve fuel
Model Total capacity
S 580 4MATIC 80.3 US qt (76.0 liters)
Of which reserve
S 580 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Quality and capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Model Engine oil specifica tions
S 580 4MATIC 229.52 229.61*
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
472 Technical data
Model Capacity
S580 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters)
Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Coolant
Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant
# Only use coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Technical data 473
# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35F (-37C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49F (-45C))
Coolant capacity Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
Model Capacity
S 580 4MATIC 16.1 US qt (15.2 liters)
Notes on windshield washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam age the plastic surface of the exterior light ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter Fit.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windshield washer flu ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round.
Refrigerant
Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 468).
474 Technical data
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R1234yf refrigerant.
* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com pressor oil
# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may be car ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig
erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.
Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig
erant used 6 Refrigerant type
Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig
erant used 6 Refrigerant type
Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop
Technical data 475
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
Model Refrigerant
Canada: S 580 4MATIC
23.6 0.4 oz (670 10 g)
USA: S 580 4MATIC 24.7 0.4 oz (700 10 g)
Model PAG oil
USA, Canada: S 580 4MATIC
4.9 0.4 oz (140 10 g)
Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension
R Optional equipment
Height when opened
Model 1 Height when opened
S 580 4MATIC 73.0 in (1855 mm)
Vehicle dimensions
S 580 4MATIC
Vehicle length 208.2 in (5289 mm)
Vehicle width including out side mirrors
83.0 in (2109 mm)
Vehicle height 59.2 in (1503 mm)
Wheelbase 126.6 in (3216 mm)
Turning radius 40.98 ft (12.49 m)
Weights and loads
Please note the following for the specified vehi cle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the payload.
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
476 Technical data
Model Maximum roof load
S 580 4MATIC
Technical data 477
Display messages Introduction
Notes about display messages Display messages appear on the driver display. Display messages with graphics are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the appearance on the driver display. The driver dis play shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message
With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the symbol to show further infor mation on the central display. Press the symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing theG back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The driver display shows these display mes sages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.
Calling up saved display messages Driver display: 4 Service 5 Message Memory: XX If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the driver display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To exit the message memory: press the back buttonG.
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
6 Restraint System Malfunc- tion Service Required
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 Left Window Airbag Mal- function Service Required (example)
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag
The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator's Man- ual
* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 53). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual
* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a person of smaller stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is
located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 53). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* The PRESAFE Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Obtain a New Key
* Have SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace Key Battery
* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 77).
Key Not Detected (white display message)
* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey
(/ page 188).
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Key Not Detected (red dis play message)
* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 188).
Don't Forget Your Key
* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor's Manual
* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 188).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483
Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
: Check Left Low Beam (example)
* The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting
diodes in the light are faulty.
: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
: Switch On Headlamps
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.
: Switch Off Lights
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited
* The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited
* The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions of the MULTIBEAM LED system.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning Light Mal- function
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update. The display message is shown every time the engine is started.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a driver display malfunction
If the driver display has failed or malfunctioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified spe cialist workshop. If the driver display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 294). # Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart
Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).
Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required
* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor's Manual
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Axle Steering Cur- rently Malfunctioning
* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning radius may increase. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
If the display message does not disappear: # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Axle Steering Malfunc- tion Service Required
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line. # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Rear Axle Steering Malfunc- tion Stop Immediately
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may tilt considerably when you drive in a straight line. Depending on the steering wheel's tilting position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind.
Snow Chain Mode Maxi- mum Speed Exceeded
* The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly.
C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
M * The hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked
The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Close the hood.
N * The trunk lid is open.
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.
# Close the trunk lid.
Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative
* The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Washer Fluid
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 329).
Intensive Cleaning Activa- ted for 30 Seconds
* Intensive cleaning of the windshield has been activated (/ page 167).
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times.
* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 188).
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual
* The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant (/ page 329). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off
* The coolant is too hot. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
* The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
8 Fuel Level Low
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
8 Fuel Filler Cap Open
* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Shift to P Only When Vehi- cle Is Stationary
* It is possible to select the park positionj only if the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj when the vehicle is stationary.
Depress Brake to Shift from P
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh,k or neutrali.
To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Engine
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj or neutrali and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. # Change the transmission position.
Depress Brake to Shift to D or R
* You have attempted to select transmission positionh ork. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh ork.
Depress Brake to Shift to R * You have attempted to select transmission positionk. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionk.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Apply Brake To Park Service Required
* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park positionj. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected
* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission positionh,k or neutrali is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park positionj when switching off the vehicle.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park positionj cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P
* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutrali was engaged with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
When the ignition is being switched off or the driver's door opened, automatic engagement of park positionj is deactivated. The vehicle may roll away.
496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Be ready to brake. # Do not leave the vehicle unattended.
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary. # Engage park positionj when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission positionh ork.
N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmis- sion Position Again
* Neutrali was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven. % When you open the driver's door in neutrali, park positionj will be engaged automatically. # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # Engage park positionj when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission positionh ork.
Reversing Not Possible Service Required
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission positionk cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutrali automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park positionj. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Posi- tion
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission positionh is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmis
sion position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling
* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir
cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion
* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor's Manual
* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow! indicator lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 212). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Can ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
To apply: # Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake
* The redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 212). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 213).
# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake
* The redF (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only) Brake Immediately
* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the engine. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.
You can restart the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
# Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Off
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 220).
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 221). # If necessary, take a break.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
P ATTENTION ASSIST Nod- ding Off Take a Break!
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 221). A warning tone will also sound. # It is recommended that you take a break immediately. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
- - - mph
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).
Suspended
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 223).
Off
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 226).
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 223). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
Active Distance Assist Inop- erative
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist Now Available
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).
Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 230). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. # Check the tire pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist Inop- erative
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Beginning Emergency Stop
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 230). # Put your hands on the steering wheel.
Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 233).
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 230). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual
* Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative
* Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 234). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative
* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 223). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive
* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 247). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 250). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Currently Unavailable Radar Dirty
* Front and corner radar sensors and/or lidar (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on.
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 215). # Restart the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Currently Unavailable Cam- era Dirty
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the
inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular.
% This condensation on the windshield is removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on.
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 215). # Restart the engine.
Driver Camera View Cur- rently Restricted See Oper- ator's Manual
* The visibility of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes: R Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver cameras field of vision.
512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
R The driver camera is dirty.
# Keep the driver camera's field of vision free. # Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 334).
Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen.
* The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight. # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.
Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* The driver camera is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Maximum Speed 12mph
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # The current level is too high. Do not drive at speeds greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
STOP Vehicle Level Too Low
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning: # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 254). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Vehicle Rising Please Wait
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Active Parking Assist Limi- ted Availability of Maneu- vering Assistance See Operator's Manual
* Active Parking Assists maneuvering assistance is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 333). # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care
fully.
516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
! Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care fully.
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
T ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual
* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package or Blind Spot Assist: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func tion, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 236). # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor's Manual
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes me connect
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Device Detected at Diag- nostics Connection See Operator's Manual
* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 31). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
G Inoperative
* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Battery
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# 12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.
# Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Switch on the engine to charge the 12 V battery.
* The engine is off and the charge level of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.
# Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running to charge the 12 V battery.
* The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir
cumstances. # Leave the engine running. # If the display goes out: you can drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual
* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
48 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. The availability of convenience functions may be restricted. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the driver dis play will show the Engine Can Now Be Started display message. # Start the engine. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger
from the vehicle.
If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear after a few minutes: # Try to start the engine again. # If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual
* The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 523
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec
tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 348). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Engine Can Now Be Started * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.
Tire pressure monitor
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable
* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on.
Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive
* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
524 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors
* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
h Check Tires
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 360) and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 525
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure
* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 364).
h Warning Tire Malfunction
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire
R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 338). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires.
526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 527
Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 327).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 472).
5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level
* The engine oil level is too high.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
* The engine oil level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
528 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir
cumstances. # Switch off the engine. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 327). # Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 472).
5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle Switch Off Engine
* The oil pressure is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure
# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 529
Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star ted or during a journey.
Driver display
Driver display with driver camera
Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 531) Seat belt (/ page 531) Power steering (yellow)
(/ page 533) Power steering (red) (/ page 533) Rear axle steering (yellow)
(/ page 533) Rear axle steering (red)
(/ page 533) Coolant temperature (/ page 535)
; Check Engine (/ page 535) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 535) 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca
tion indicator (/ page 535) F USA: electric parking brake (red)
(/ page 539) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red)
(/ page 539) ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 539) USA: Recuperative Brake System
(/ page 539) J Canada: brakes (yellow)
(/ page 539) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 539) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 539) L Distance warning (/ page 542) AIRMATIC (/ page 542) ! ABS (/ page 543) ESP (/ page 543) ESP OFF (/ page 543)
530 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
H Mercedes me connect (/ page 546)
h Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 546)
T Parking lamps (/ page 154) L Low beam (/ page 154) K High beam (/ page 155) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 155) R Rear fog lamp (/ page 154)
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
6 Restraint system warning lamp
* The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Comply with the messages on the driver display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 531
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Seat belt warning lamp flashes
* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 46). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
*The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 46).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
532 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Power steering warning lamp (yellow)
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit when the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display.
Power steering warning lamp (red)
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 533
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)
* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display.
Rear axle steering warning lamp (red)
* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
534 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Coolant warning lamp (red)
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot gases. R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 535
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances. # Note the messages on the driver display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.
Coolant warning lamp (yel low)
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
536 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
; Engine diagnosis warning lamp
* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Electrical malfunction warn ing lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the driver's display.
8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak ing. # Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 537
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
538 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (USA only)
! Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (Canada only)
! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp
*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the driver's display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 539
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)
J Brakes warning lamp (yel low) (Canada only)
*The yellow warning lamp (USA only) or the yellowJ brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The hill start assist may be malfunctioning. # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
540 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)
J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)
* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 541
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
L Warning lamp for distance warning function
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 236).
Suspension warning lamp (yellow)
* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC. # Note the messages on the driver display.
Suspension warning lamp (red)
* The red AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC.
* NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
542 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
* The Active Brake Assist yellow warning lamp is lit. The system is restricted or unavailable. # Note the messages on the driver display.
Driving safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
! ABS warning lamp
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver's display.
& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 543
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP warning lamp flashes
* The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 218). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP warning lamp lights up
* The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Comply with the messages on the driver's display.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
544 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
ESP OFF warning lamp
* The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated
ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 218).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 545
Mercedes me connect
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
H Mercedes me connect warning lamp
*At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is mal functioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes
*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
546 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 547
1, 2, 3 ... 3D driver display
Function/notes..................................... 273 3D instrument cluster
see 3D driver display 4MATIC
Function................................................ 205 12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle) 48 V on-board electrical system
see EQ Boost technology 115 V socket
see Socket (115 V) 360 Camera
Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. 261 Selecting a view..................................... 261
A A/C function
Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system)..................................... 177
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 217
Acceleration see Kickdown
Accident and Breakdown Manage ment
Mercedes me connect........................... 307 Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating........................... 76 Activating a commuter route................... 300 Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating......................... 250 Brake application................................... 249 Function................................................ 247 System limitations................................. 247
Active Brake Assist Function/notes..................................... 236 Setting................................................... 240
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 233 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 234 Calling up a speed................................. 226 Function................................................ 223 Increasing/decreasing speed................ 226 Requirements........................................ 226 Route-based speed adaptation.............. 228
Steering wheel buttons......................... 226 Storing a speed..................................... 226 Switching off/deactivating.................... 226 Switching on/activating........................ 226 System limitations................................. 223
Active Emergency Stop Assist................. 233 Active Lane Change Assist
Activating/deactivating......................... 236 Function................................................ 234
Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 252 Activating/deactivating the warning..... 253 Function................................................ 250 Setting the sensitivity............................ 253 System limits......................................... 250
Active light function.................................. 157 Active Parking Assist
Cross traffic warning............................. 270 Drive Away Assist.................................. 269 Exiting a parking space......................... 269 Function................................................ 265 Maneuvering brake function.................. 271 Parking.................................................. 267 System limitations................................. 265
548 Index
Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist Display.................................................. 227 Function................................................ 227
Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 232 Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 233 Active Lane Change Assist.................... 234 Function................................................ 230 System limits......................................... 230
Active Traffic Jam Assist Function................................................ 230
Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................. 161 Switching on/off................................... 162
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating......................... 163 Function................................................ 162
Additives Engine oil............................................... 472 Fuel....................................................... 470
Additives (engine oil) see Additives
Additives (fuel) see Fuel
ADS PLUS damping system see AIRMATIC
Adverse weather light............................... 158 After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS Air bag
Reduced protection................................. 51 Air conditioning menu
Calling up.............................................. 177 Air distribution
Setting................................................... 175 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 177
Air freshener system see Perfume atomizer
Air inlet see Air-water duct
Air pressure see Tire pressure
Air suspension see AIRMATIC
Air vents Adjusting (front).................................... 184 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 184 Glove box.............................................. 185
Air vents see Air vents
Air-conditioning system see Climate control
Air-recirculation mode.............................. 178 Air-water duct
Keeping free.......................................... 330 Airbag
Activation................................................ 42 Belt airbag............................................... 46 Cushionbag............................................. 48 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 48 Installation locations............................... 48 Knee airbag............................................. 48 Overview................................................. 48 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 53 Protection................................................ 49 Rear airbag.............................................. 48
Index 549
REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....... 58 Side airbag.............................................. 48 Window curtain airbag............................. 48
Airflow Setting................................................... 175
AIRMATIC Setting................................................... 254 Suspension........................................... 253
Alarm see Panic alarm
Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
All-wheel drive see 4MATIC
Alternative route see Route
Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 165
Android Auto see Smartphone integration
Animals Pets in the vehicle.................................... 74
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains see Snow chains
Anti-theft protection Immobilizer............................................ 102
Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration
Assistance systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods.............. 325 Displaying the service due date............. 324 Function/notes..................................... 324 Regular maintenance work.................... 324 Special service requirements................ 324
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor....................................... 104 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm..................................................... 103 Deactivating the alarm.......................... 103 Function................................................ 102 Function of the interior motion sensor.. 103 The tow-away alarm function................. 103
ATTENTION ASSIST Setting................................................... 223 System limits......................................... 221
ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection
Function................................................ 221 Attention assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection
Augmented reality Function on the Head-up Display........... 276
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
550 Index
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights........................... 155 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 195 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function)............................................ 195 Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff
Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff................. 51 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 53
Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Automatic lateral support adjustment Setting................................................... 122
Automatic measures after an accident..... 60 Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating......................... 173 Automatic seat adjustment
Setting................................................... 121
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 201 Drive program display............................ 199 Drive programs...................................... 198 DYNAMIC SELECT button...................... 198 Engaging drive position......................... 203 Engaging neutral................................... 202 Engaging park position.......................... 202 Engaging reverse gear........................... 202 Kickdown.............................................. 204 Manual gearshifting............................... 203 Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. 203 Transmission position display................ 201 Transmission positions.......................... 201
B Bag hook.................................................... 140 BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 217 Battery
see Battery (vehicle) Battery (SmartKey)
Replacing................................................. 77 Battery (vehicle)
Charging................................................ 348
Charging (Remote Online)..................... 189 Notes.................................................... 344 Notes (starting assistance and charging)............................................... 346 Replacing.............................................. 349 Starting assistance................................ 348
Belt see Seat belt
Belt airbag Activation................................................ 42 Function/notes....................................... 46
Blind see Roller sunblind
Blower see Climate control
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid Notes..................................................... 473
Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 219
Index 551
Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 217 Active Brake Assist................................ 236 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 217 Driving tips............................................ 192 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 219 HOLD function...................................... 220 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 192 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs...................................................... 190 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 190 Post-collision brake................................. 60
Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown Changing a wheel.................................. 380 Overview of the help functions................ 22 Roadside Assistance............................... 28 Tow-starting.......................................... 353 Towing away.......................................... 351 Transporting the vehicle........................ 352
Breakdown see Flat tire
C Calls
Mercedes me........................................ 309 Camera
see Driver camera see Rear view camera see Surround view camera
Car key see SmartKey
Car wash see Care
Car wash (care)......................................... 330 Car-to-X-Communication
Displaying hazard warnings................... 302 Care
Air-water duct........................................ 330 Automatic car wash............................... 330 Carpet................................................... 334 Decorative foil....................................... 332 Display.................................................. 334 EASY-PACK trunk box............................ 334 Exterior lighting..................................... 333 Headliner............................................... 334
Paintwork.............................................. 332 Plastic trim............................................ 334 Power washer........................................ 331 Real wood/trim elements..................... 334 Rear view camera.................................. 333 Seat belt................................................ 334 Seat cover............................................. 334 Sensors................................................. 333 Steering wheel...................................... 334 Surround view camera.......................... 333 Tailpipes................................................ 333 Washing by hand................................... 331 Wheels/rims......................................... 333 Windows................................................ 333 Wiper blades......................................... 333
Carpet (Care)............................................. 334 Change of address...................................... 28 Change of ownership.................................. 28 Changing a wheel
Preparation........................................... 380 Raising the vehicle................................. 381
Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel
552 Index
Changing gears Manually................................................ 203
Changing hub caps.................................... 381 Charging
Battery (vehicle).................................... 348 Mobile phone (wireless)......................... 149 USB port................................................ 146
Chauffeur mode Information............................................ 113 Moving the front passenger seat into the chauffeur position............................ 114 Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position................................ 116
Child safety lock Rear doors............................................... 72 Rear side windows................................... 73
Child seat Attaching (notes)..................................... 64 Basic instructions.................................... 60 Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 70 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing).............. 66 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 61 Rear airbag.............................................. 69 Securing on the front passenger seat...... 71
Securing on the rear seat........................ 69 Top Tether............................................... 68
Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 61 Basic instructions.................................... 60 Special seat belt retractor....................... 65
Chock Storage location.................................... 380
Chock see Chock
City lighting............................................... 158 Cleaning
see Care Climate control
Activating/deactivating......................... 176 Activating/deactivating (rear operat ing unit)................................................. 177 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system)...... 177 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. 178 Air-recirculation mode........................... 178 Automatic control.................................. 177
Calling up the air conditioning menu..... 177 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control....................................... 175 Defrosting the windshield...................... 175 Filling capacity for PAG oil..................... 476 Front air vents....................................... 184 Glove box air vent.................................. 185 Immediate pre-entry climate control..... 183 Information on the windshield heater.... 180 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra grance system)...................................... 179 Ionization............................................... 179 Note....................................................... 175 Pre-entry climate control at depar ture time................................................ 181 Rear air vents........................................ 184 Rear operating unit................................ 176 Refrigerant............................................. 474 Refrigerant filling capacity..................... 476 Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 178 Residual heat......................................... 178 Residual heat (rear operating unit)........ 179 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 177 Setting the air distribution..................... 175 Setting the airflow................................. 175
Index 553
Setting the fragrance system................. 179 Setting the temperature........................ 175 Switching the rear window heater on/off.................................................... 175 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 93
Cockpit Overview................................................... 6
Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection
Collision detection (parked vehicle) Information............................................ 213
Combination switch.................................. 155 Consumption indicator
Calling up.............................................. 200 Content sharing menu
Overview............................................... 281 Control elements
Touch-sensitive........................................ 27 Convenience closing................................... 93 Convenience opening.................................. 93
Coolant (engine) Capacity................................................. 474 Check level............................................ 329 Notes..................................................... 473
Cooling see Climate control
Copyrights License.................................................... 40 Trademarks............................................. 40
Cornering light........................................... 157 Crosswind Assist
Function/notes...................................... 219 Cup holder
Switching the cooling/heating func tion on/off............................................ 144
Cushionbag.................................................. 48 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 33 Customer Relations Department............... 33
D Dashboard
see Cockpit
Data acquisition Vehicle.................................................... 35
Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 38
Data storage Data protection rights............................. 38 Electronic control units........................... 35 Online services........................................ 37 Vehicle.................................................... 35
Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights Switching on/off................................... 164
Deactivating the alarm (ATA).................... 103 Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components.................. 30 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 332 Definitions (tires and loading).................. 374 Destination entry
Entering a POI or address...................... 299
554 Index
Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection.............................. 31 Diesel
Low outside temperatures..................... 471 Notes..................................................... 471
DIGITAL LIGHT Assistance functions............................. 159 Cornering light....................................... 157 Intelligent Light System......................... 157 Switching the Intelligent Light Sys tem on/off............................................ 160 Topographical compensation................. 158
Digital Operator's Manual........................... 24 Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever
Engaging drive position......................... 203 Engaging neutral................................... 202 Engaging park position.......................... 202 Engaging park position automatically.... 202 Engaging reverse gear........................... 202 Function................................................ 201
Display (care)............................................. 334 Display (driver display)
Messages in the driver display.............. 279 Display (MBUX multimedia system)
Home screen......................................... 281 Operating the touchscreen.................... 282 Settings................................................. 278
Display message Calling up (driver display)...................... 478 Notes..................................................... 478
Display messages - - - mph....................................... 506 # 12 V On-board Electrical Sys tem Service Required............................ 521 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual.................................................. 523 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... 485 ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... 505 P ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break!................................... 506
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 505 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................ 484 Beginning Emergency Stop........... 508 $ Brake Immediately....................... 503 $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 504 # Check Brake Pads See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 504 + Check Coolant Level See Oper ator's Manual........................................ 493 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 528 : Check Left Low Beam (exam ple)........................................................ 484 h Check Tires.................................. 525 Check Washer Fluid..................... 492 Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off..................................... 493
Index 555
Currently Unavailable Camera Dirty....................................................... 512 Currently Unavailable Radar Dirty....................................................... 511 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. 516 Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. 517 Don't Forget Your Key.................. 483 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 529 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi cle Turn Engine Off................................ 528 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level...................................................... 528 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Vehi cle Switch Off Engine............................ 529 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)................................ 479 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open..................... 494
8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 494 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................................... 517 Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................................... 518 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................................... 519 G Inoperative................................... 520 Intensive Cleaning Activated for 30 Seconds...................................... 492 Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... 483 Key Not Detected (white dis play message)....................................... 482 6 Left Window Airbag Malfunc tion Service Required (example)............ 479 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph....................................................... 513 : Malfunction See Operators Manual.................................................. 484
Maximum Speed 12mph............... 514 Obtain a New Key......................... 482 Off................................................ 506 Off................................................ 505 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. 499 h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ 526 F Please Release Parking Brake...... 502 Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat tery..................................................... 523 Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning...................................... 489 Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required................................... 489 Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately.................................. 490 Replace Key Battery..................... 482 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required................................... 479
556 Index
Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required.................... 488 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.. 488 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual..... 489 # Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running to charge the 12 V battery................................................... 522 STOP Vehicle Level Too Low......... 514 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 521 Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual.................................................. 522 Suspended................................... 506 : Switch Off Lights.......................... 485 : Switch On Headlamps.................. 485 # Switch on the engine to charge the 12 V battery.................................... 522
F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake.................................. 503 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting............... 488 Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ 515 h Warning Tire Malfunction............. 526 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. 525 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 510 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative....... 510 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur rently Limited See Operator's Manual.... 519 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi ted See Operator's Manual................... 520 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 507 Active Distance Assist Inoperative........ 507 Active Distance Assist Now Available.... 507
Active Emergency Stop Assist Cur rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 508 Active Emergency Stop Assist Inop erative................................................... 508 Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 509 Active Lane Change Assist Inopera tive........................................................ 509 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 510 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera tive......................................................... 510 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual........................................... 515 Active Parking Assist Limited Availa bility of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual................................. 515
Index 557
Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer gency Stops........................................... 508 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 507 Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... 507 Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 509 Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... 509 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 486 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.. 486 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. 486 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop erative................................................... 486 Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative............................................ 491
Apply Brake To Park Service Required... 496 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction................ 498 Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Manual.................................................. 523 Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen................. 513 Decrease Speed.................................... 527 Depress Brake to Shift from P............... 495 Depress Brake to Shift to D or R........... 495 Depress Brake to Shift to R................... 495 Device Detected at Diagnostics Con nection See Operator's Manual............. 520 DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited.......... 485 Driver Camera Inoperative See Oper ator's Manual......................................... 513 Driver Camera View Currently Restricted See Operator's Manual......... 512 Engine Can Now Be Started.................. 524
Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................ 480 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................ 480 Hazard Warning Light Malfunction........ 486 MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited...... 485 N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again..... 497 PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual........................................... 515 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 483 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... 481 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual.......................................... 481 Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ 497 Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park......................................... 496
558 Index
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected....... 496 Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Acti vated Manually No Automatic Change to P........................................... 496 Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position............................ 498 Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Sta tionary................................................... 495 Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Exceeded............................................... 490 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling.................... 498 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ 524 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative.............. 524 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors...................................... 525 Tires Overheated................................... 527
To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Engine.................................... 495 To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec onds or press 3 times........................... 492 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail able See Operator's Manual.................. 509 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative................ 510 Transmission Malfunction Stop............. 497
Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door Child safety lock (rear doors)................... 72 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 83 Opening (from inside).............................. 80 Power closing function............................ 82 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 80
Door control panel...................................... 18 Door control panel (rear passenger compartment).............................................. 20
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 370 Drawbar
see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving.................................. 192 Drive Away Assist...................................... 269 Drive position
Inserting................................................ 203 Drive program display............................... 199 Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver camera
Activating/deactivating......................... 289 Overview............................................... 289
Driver display 48 V on-board electrical system............ 278 Displaying the service due date............. 324 EQ Boost technology............................. 278 Function/notes..................................... 273 Notes on menus.................................... 274 Operating.............................................. 273 Overview of displays.............................. 279
Driver display with driver camera.............. 12
Index 559
Driver's display Indicator/warning lamps....................... 530
Driver's seat see Seat
Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 217 Active Brake Assist................................ 236 BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 217 Cameras................................................ 215 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)....................................................... 219 ESP Crosswind Assist.......................... 219 Overview................................................ 216 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 215 Responsibility........................................ 215 STEER CONTROL................................... 219
Driving system see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist
see AIRMATIC see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Surround view camera see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving tips Drinking and driving.............................. 192 General driving tips............................... 192 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 190 Optimized acceleration.......................... 191
Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection
Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT Configuring drive program I................... 200 Displaying engine data.......................... 200 Displaying vehicle data.......................... 200 Drive program display............................ 199
Drive programs...................................... 198 Function................................................ 198 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... 199 Selecting the drive program.................. 199
E E10............................................................. 469 Easy entry feature
Function/notes..................................... 127 Setting................................................... 128
Easy exit feature Function/notes..................................... 127 Setting................................................... 128
EASY-PACK trunk box Adjusting the height to any position...... 140 Care...................................................... 334 Installing/removing............................... 142
EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)
Function/notes...................................... 219 ECO Assist
Function/notes...................................... 197
560 Index
ECO display Function................................................ 197
ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start.......................... 195 Automatic engine stop........................... 195 Method of operation.............................. 195 Switching off/on................................... 196
Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 211 Applying/releasing manually................. 212 Emergency braking................................ 213 Releasing automatically......................... 212
Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 338 Overview of the help functions................ 22 Reflective safety vest............................. 337 Removing the warning triangle.............. 338 Setting up the warning triangle............. 338
Emergency braking.................................... 213 Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency engine start........................... 353 Emergency key
Locking/unlocking the doors.................. 83 Emergency operation mode
Starting the vehicle............................... 188 Emergency release
Trunk lid (from inside).............................. 90 Emergency spare wheel
Notes.................................................... 386 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation................................................ 42 Engine
ECO start/stop function........................ 195 Engine number...................................... 466 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 188 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 189 Starting (start/stop button).................. 188 Starting assistance................................ 348 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 207
Engine data Displaying.............................................. 200
Engine number.......................................... 466
Engine oil Additives................................................ 472 Capacity................................................ 472 Checking the oil level with the driver display................................................... 327 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 472 Quality................................................... 472 Topping up............................................. 327
EQ boost Qualified specialist workshop.................. 32
EQ Boost technology Notes..................................................... 278 Operating safety...................................... 28
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP Crosswind Assist................................... 219
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating......................... 219 Function/notes...................................... 218
Exterior lighting Care...................................................... 333
Index 561
Exterior lighting see Lights
Exterior mirrors Automatic mirror folding function.......... 173 Automatic preselection (MBUX Inte rior Assistant)........................................ 288 Folding in/out........................................ 171 Operating the memory function............. 129 Parking position..................................... 172 Setting................................................... 171
F Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection
Favorites Adding................................................... 291
First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ 338 Flacon
Inserting/removing............................... 179 Flat tire
Changing a wheel.................................. 380 MOExtended tires.................................. 339 Notes.................................................... 338
TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Flat towing
see Tow-bar system Floor mats.................................................. 152 Fog light (extended range)....................... 158 Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 215 Folding table.............................................. 136 Footrest
Rear passenger seat.............................. 115 Fragrance
see Perfume atomizer Free software.............................................. 40 Frequencies
Two-way radio....................................... 388 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 48 Front passenger seat
Adjusting from the driver's seat............ 108 Adjusting from the rear passenger compartment........................................ 109
Front passenger seat see Seat
Fuel Additives............................................... 470 Diesel.................................................... 471 E10........................................................ 469 Fuel reserve........................................... 472 Gasoline................................................ 469 Low outside temperatures..................... 471 Quality (diesel)....................................... 471 Quality (gasoline).................................. 469 Refueling............................................... 205 Sulfur content....................................... 469 Tank content.......................................... 472
Function seat see Door control panel
Function seat (rear passenger com partment)
see Seat (rear passenger compartment) Fuses
Before replacing a fuse.......................... 354 Dashboard fuse box.............................. 356 Fuse assignment diagram..................... 354 Fuse box in the engine compartment.... 354 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well........................................................ 357 Fuse box in the trunk............................. 357
562 Index
Notes.................................................... 354 Fuses
see Fuses
G Garage door opener
Clearing the memory............................. 211 Programming buttons............................ 209 Resolving problems............................... 210 Synchronizing the rolling code............... 210
Garage door openers Opening/closing the door...................... 211
Gasoline..................................................... 469 Gearshift recommendation...................... 204 Genuine parts.............................................. 25 Glide mode................................................. 204 Glove box
Air vent.................................................. 185
H Handbrake
see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 358 HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................. 88 Handset
Stowage compartment (rear passenger compartment)...................... 137
Hazard warning lights............................... 156 Hazardous substances
Information.............................................. 28 Head restraint
Activating/deactivating neck heating.... 119 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (front)....................................... 118 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (rear passenger compart ment)..................................................... 119 Front (luxury head restraint).................. 117 Rear (folding into position/folding back mechanically)................................ 120 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting).............................................. 118 Rear passenger compartment (lower ing from the front).................................. 118 Rear passenger compartment (luxury head restraint)....................................... 119
Head-up Display Augmented reality................................. 276 Function................................................ 275 Operating.............................................. 277 Operating (with augmented reality)....... 278 Operating the memory function............. 129 Switching on/off................................... 278
Headlamps see Automatic driving lights
Headliner (care)......................................... 334 Heating
see Climate control Help call
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam
Activating/deactivating......................... 155 High beam
see Adaptive Highbeam Assist High-beam flasher..................................... 155 High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 162 Highway mode........................................... 158
Index 563
Hill start assist.......................................... 221 HOLD function
Function/notes..................................... 220 Switching on/off................................... 220
Home screen (central display) Overview............................................... 281
Hood Opening/closing................................... 325
I Identification plate
Engine................................................... 466 Refrigerant............................................. 474 Vehicle.................................................. 466
Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 187
Ignition key see SmartKey
Immediate pre-entry climate control...... 183 Immobilizer................................................ 102 Indicator lamp
see Indicator/warning lamp
Indicator/warning lamp Overview............................................... 530
Individual drive program Configuring........................................... 200 Selecting............................................... 199
Inside rearview mirror Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 172
Inside rearview mirror see Outside mirrors
Inspection see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster see Driver display
Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating......................... 160 Active light function............................... 157 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 161 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 162 Adverse weather light............................ 158 Assistance functions............................. 159 City lighting........................................... 158 Cornering light....................................... 157 Fog light (extended range)..................... 158 Highway mode....................................... 158
Overview................................................ 157 Topographical compensation................. 158
Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 164 Ambient lighting.................................... 165 Reading lamp......................................... 164 Switch-off delay time............................. 167
Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating......................... 104 Function................................................ 103
Internet radio see TuneIn
Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system)..................................... 179
iPhone see Smartphone integration
J Jack
Storage location.................................... 380 Jump-start connection
General notes........................................ 346
564 Index
K KEYLESS-GO
Deactivating............................................ 77 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................ 80 Problem................................................... 82 Unlocking setting..................................... 76
Kickdown Using..................................................... 204
Knee airbag.................................................. 48
L Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling Lamp
see Interior lighting Lamps (driver's display)
see Indicator/warning lamp Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor
Installing.................................................. 66 Level control system
see AIRMATIC Light switch
Overview............................................... 154 Lighting
see Interior lighting see Lights
Lights Active light function............................... 157 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 161 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 162 Adverse weather light............................ 158 Automatic driving lights......................... 155 City lighting........................................... 158 Combination switch............................... 155 Cornering light....................................... 157 Fog light (extended range)..................... 158 Hazard warning lights............................ 156 High beam............................................. 155 High-beam flasher................................. 155 Highway mode....................................... 158
Intelligent Light System......................... 157 Light switch........................................... 154 Low-beam headlamps........................... 154 Parking lights......................................... 154 Rear fog lamp........................................ 154 Responsibility for lighting systems........ 154 Setting the exterior lighting switch- off delay time........................................ 164 Standing lights....................................... 154 Switching the Intelligent Light Sys tem on/off............................................ 160 Switching the locator lighting on/off..... 164 Turn signal light..................................... 155
Limited Warranty Vehicle.................................................... 35
Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis play on.................................................. 302
Load index (tires)...................................... 372 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................... 372 Loading
Bag hook............................................... 140 Definitions............................................. 374 Notes..................................................... 133
Index 565
Roof luggage rack.................................. 143 Loading guidelines.................................... 133 Loading information table........................ 365 Loads
Securing................................................ 133 Locator lighting
Activating/deactivating......................... 164 Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature............................... 82 Emergency key........................................ 83 KEYLESS-GO........................................... 80 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................ 80
Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off................................... 154
Lubricant additives see Additives
Luggage Net hooks.............................................. 137 Securing................................................ 133
M MAGIC VISION CONTROL
Windshield wipers................................. 170 Maintenance
Vehicle.................................................... 28 Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction
Restraint system..................................... 42 Malfunction message
see Display message Maneuvering assistance
Activating/deactivating......................... 272 Cross traffic warning............................. 270 Drive Away Assist.................................. 269
Maneuvering brake function.................... 271 Maneuvering brake function
see Protection against collision Map
Displaying online map contents............ 302 Displaying weather information............. 302 Moving.................................................. 302 Selecting the map orientation............... 302
Setting the map scale............................ 302 Massage program
Overview............................................... 122 Resetting the settings............................ 123
Massage programs Selecting the front seats....................... 123
Massage settings Resetting............................................... 123
Maximum load rating................................ 371 Maximum permissible load
Calculation example.............................. 367 Determining.......................................... 366
Maximum tire pressure............................ 371 MBUX Interior Assistant
Anticipatory exit warning....................... 286 Automatic preselection of the out side mirror............................................. 288 Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free........................................... 287 Switching the search light for the driver on/off......................................... 287
566 Index
MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) Calling up favorites with the V pose...... 288 Operating a function with the favor ites pose............................................... 288 Overview............................................... 284
MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... 359 Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 215 Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 213 Configuring display settings.................. 278 Configuring drive program I................... 200 Driver camera........................................ 289 Home screen......................................... 281 Notes.................................................... 280 Operating the touchscreen.................... 282 Overview............................................... 280 Setting route-based speed adaptation.. 230 Setting the footwell temperature........... 178 Setting the rear climate control............. 178
MBUX Voice Assistant Function................................................ 283 Voice prompting.................................... 283
Mechanical key Inserting/removing................................. 77
Unlocking the trunk lid............................ 90 Media
Overview of the functions and sym bols........................................................ 317
Medical aids................................................. 33 Memory function
Function................................................ 128 Head-up Display Calling up stored settings................................................. 129 Head-up Display Storing settings....... 129 Operating.............................................. 129 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings................................................. 129 Outside mirrors Storing settings........ 129 Seat Calling up stored settings........... 129 Seat Storing settings.......................... 129 Steering wheel Calling up saved settings................................................. 129 Steering wheel Saving settings........... 129
Memory function in the rear passenger compartment
Function................................................ 130 Operating rear seats.............................. 131
Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats....................................... 132
Menus (driver display) Notes..................................................... 274
Mercedes me app Information............................................ 312
Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment........... 310 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center................................................... 309 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. 310 Information............................................ 309 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel............................................... 309 Transferred data..................................... 311
Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage ment...................................................... 307 Information............................................ 307 Transferred data.................................... 308
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... 315
Index 567
Information............................................ 314 Information on data transfer.................. 316 Manual emergency call.......................... 315 Overview................................................ 314
Message (driver display) see Display message
Message memory...................................... 478 Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone
Wireless charging (rear passenger compartment)........................................ 151
Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Model series see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tires..................................... 339 MULTIBEAM LED
Intelligent Light System......................... 157 Multimedia system
Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 213
Coupling the steering wheel heater to the seat heating................................ 127 Enabling/disabling the rear airbag.......... 58
Multimedia system see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi media system) see MBUX multimedia system
N Navigation
Notes..................................................... 297 Overview............................................... 298 Switching on......................................... 298
Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route
Neutral Inserting................................................ 202
Nodding off see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle......... 190
O Occupant safety
see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Rear airbag see Restraint system see Seat belt
Oil see Engine oil
On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection
Online services Data storage............................................ 37
568 Index
Open-source software................................ 40 Opening the trunk lid using your foot
HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 88 Operating fluids
Additives (fuel)...................................... 470 Brake fluid............................................. 473 Coolant (engine).................................... 473 Engine oil............................................... 472 Fuel (diesel)........................................... 471 Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 469 Notes.................................................... 468 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 474 Windshield washer fluid......................... 474
Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system.............. 28 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 30 EQ Boost technology............................... 28 Information.............................................. 28
Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 26
Operator's Manual (digital)......................... 24 Optimized acceleration
Activating............................................... 191
Outside mirrors Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 172
Overhead control panel Overview.................................................. 16
P Paint code.................................................. 466 Paintwork (cleaning instructions)........... 332 Panel heating
Setting................................................... 124 Panic alarm
Activating/deactivating........................... 76 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
see Sliding sunroof Parcel net hooks........................................ 137 Park position
Inserting................................................ 202 Selecting automatically......................... 202
Parking see Electric parking brake
Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating.............................................. 264 Adjusting warning tones........................ 265 Function................................................. 261 Switching off......................................... 264 System limitations................................. 261
Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking for an extended period................ 214 Parking lights............................................. 154 Parking position
Exterior mirrors..................................... 172 Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... 173
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Index 569
Payload Calculation example.............................. 367 Determining the maximum.................... 366
Perfume see Perfume atomizer
Perfume atomizer Inserting/removing the flacon............... 179 Setting................................................... 179
Perfume vial see Perfume atomizer
Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 215 Standby mode function.......................... 214
Permitted towing methods...................... 350 Pets in the vehicle....................................... 74 Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 334 Post-collision brake..................................... 60 Power closing function
Door........................................................ 82 Trunk lid.................................................. 85
Power supply Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 187
Power washer (care)................................. 331 Pre-entry climate control (immediate).... 183 Pre-entry climate control at depar ture time
Function................................................. 181 Setting................................................... 182 Switching on/off................................... 182
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)
Function.................................................. 58 PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 58 Reversing measures................................ 59
PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Activation................................................ 42 Function.................................................. 59
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus)
Function.................................................. 59 Reversing measures................................ 59
Preventative occupant protection sys tem
see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Profile Notes.................................................... 290
Program see DYNAMIC SELECT
Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 25
Protection against collision...................... 271 Protection against collision
see Drive Away Assist Pulling away
see Driving tips
Q QR code
Rescue card............................................ 35 Qualified specialist workshop................... 32
R Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage................................................. 215
570 Index
Radio Overview of the functions and sym bols........................................................ 319
Radio operating permits........................... 389 Rain-closing feature
Sliding sunroof........................................ 98 Reading lamp
see Interior lighting Reading light
Switching on/off with hand move ments.................................................... 287
Real wood (Care)....................................... 334 Rear airbag
Activating/deactivating........................... 58 Points to remember when the rear seat is occupied...................................... 56 REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....... 58
Rear axle steering..................................... 195 Rear climate control
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 178 Rear doors (child safety lock).................... 72
Rear fog lamp Switching on/off................................... 155
Rear passenger compartment seat Seats..................................................... 110
REAR SEAT AIR BAG status display see Rear airbag
Rear view camera Activating using GPS (surround view camera)................................................. 261 Care...................................................... 333 Function........................................ 255, 257 Opening the camera cover (360 Camera)................................................. 261 Setting (surround view camera)............. 261
Rear view camera see Surround view camera
Rear window Roller sunblind....................................... 100
Rear window heater.................................. 175 Reflective safety vest............................... 337 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)
Notes..................................................... 474
Refrigerator box Removing/installing.............................. 148 Stowage compartment.......................... 149 Using..................................................... 147
Refueling Refueling the vehicle............................. 205
Remote Online Charging the starter battery.................. 189 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior...... 189 Starting the vehicle............................... 189
Reporting safety defects............................ 34 Rescue card................................................. 35 Reserve
Fuel....................................................... 472 Residual heat
Rear operating unit................................ 179 Restraint system
Basic instructions for children................. 60 Function in an accident........................... 42 Functionality............................................ 41 Malfunction............................................. 42 Protection................................................ 41 Reduced protection................................. 41
Index 571
Self-test................................................... 41 Warning lamp........................................... 41
Reverse gear Inserting................................................ 202
Rims (care)................................................. 333 Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............ 28 Roll away protection
see HOLD function Roller sunblind
Rear window.......................................... 100 Side windows (electric)......................... 100 Sliding sunroof........................................ 95
Roof load.................................................... 476 Roof luggage rack
Loading................................................. 143 Securing................................................ 143
Route Activating a commuter route................. 300 Calculating............................................ 300 Selecting a type.................................... 300 Selecting an alternative route............... 300
Route guidance with augmented real ity
Activating.............................................. 300 Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ 300
Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................ 228 Setting................................................... 230
Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. 339
S Safety systems
see Driving safety system Satellite radio
Logging in.............................................. 322 Setting music and sport alerts.............. 322
Search light Switching on/off with hand move ments.................................................... 287
Seat Adjusting (electrically)........................... 105 Adjusting a reclining rear seat................ 111
Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compart ment...................................................... 109 Automatic seat adjustment.................... 121 Configuring the settings......................... 121 Correct driver's seat position................ 105 Massage program overview................... 122 Operating the memory function............. 129 Panel heating......................................... 124 Rear passenger compartment footrest.. 115 Resetting the settings............................ 123 Setting automatic lateral support adjustment............................................ 122 Setting options........................................ 18 Setting the fully reclined position........... 112 Workout program overview.................... 122
Seat see Chauffeur mode see Front passenger seat
Seat (rear passenger compartment) Setting options........................................ 20
Seat belt Care...................................................... 334 Protection................................................ 43
572 Index
Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 47 Function.................................................. 47
Seat belt warning see Seat belts
Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 47 Adjusting the height................................ 46 Belt airbag............................................... 46 Fastening................................................. 46 Reduced protection................................. 44 Releasing................................................. 47 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 47 Warning lamp.......................................... 47
Seat cover (Care)....................................... 334 Seat heating
Activating/deactivating......................... 123 Seat ventilation
Activating/deactivating......................... 125 Seats
Rear passenger compartment (adjusting electrically)............................ 110
Selecting a gear see Changing gears
Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff.............................................. 53
Sensors (care)........................................... 333 Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS Setting the footwell temperature
Setting................................................... 178 Setting the map scale
see Map Shift paddles
see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears
Gearshift recommendation................... 204 Side airbag................................................... 48
Side windows Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment......................... 73 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 93 Convenience closing............................... 93 Convenience opening.............................. 93 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 93 Opening/closing...................................... 91 Problem................................................... 94 Roller sunblind (electric)........................ 100
Size designation (tires)............................. 372 Sliding sunroof
Automatic features.................................. 98 Closing.................................................... 95 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 93 Opening................................................... 95 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 93 Problem................................................... 98 Rain-closing feature................................. 98
SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal.......... 76 Battery.................................................... 77 Deactivating functions............................. 77 Energy consumption................................ 77 Features.................................................. 75
Index 573
Key ring attachment................................ 77 Mechanical key........................................ 77 Overview................................................. 75 Panic alarm.............................................. 76 Problem................................................... 79 Unlocking setting..................................... 76
Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Smartphone integration Overview................................................ 313
Snow chain mode Activating/deactivating......................... 359
Snow chains.............................................. 359 Socket (12 V)
Rear passenger compartment............... 144 Socket (115 V)
Rear passenger compartment............... 145 Software update
System updates..................................... 294 Sound
PRE-SAFE Sound................................... 58 Wheels and tires.................................... 358
Sound menu Functions overview............................... 323
Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Special seat belt retractor.......................... 65 Specialist workshop.................................... 32 Speed index (tires).................................... 372 Standby mode
Activating/deactivating......................... 215 Function................................................. 214
Standing lights.......................................... 154 Start-off assist
see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button
Parking the vehicle................................ 207 Starting the vehicle............................... 188 Switching on the power supply or ignition.................................................. 187
Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function
Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)..................... 189
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting the engine see Vehicle
Starting-off aid see Hill start assist
STEER CONTROL Function/notes...................................... 219
Steering Rear axle steering.................................. 195
Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)........................... 125 Care...................................................... 334 Operating the memory function............. 129 Steering wheel heater............................ 126
Steering wheel heater Coupling to seat heating........................ 127 Switching on/off................................... 126
Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 203 Storage areas
see Storage space Storage compartments
see Storage space
574 Index
Storage space Armrest................................................. 135 Center console...................................... 135 Door...................................................... 135 Glove box............................................... 135 USB ports.............................................. 135
Stowage compartment Handset (rear passenger compart ment)..................................................... 137 Parcel net hooks.................................... 137
Sulfur content........................................... 469 Surround View
see Surround view camera Surround view camera
Activating using GPS (rear view cam era)........................................................ 261 Button.................................................... 261 Care...................................................... 333 Function................................................ 257 Setting (rear view camera)..................... 261
Suspension Setting the suspension level (AIR MATIC).................................................. 254
Suspension see AIRMATIC
Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Setting................................................... 254
Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. 164 Interior................................................... 167
Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system)..................................... 178
System settings Overview of the system settings menu..................................................... 294
T Tailpipes (care).......................................... 333 Tank content
Fuel....................................................... 472 Reserve (fuel)........................................ 472
Technical data Information............................................ 387 Radio operating permits........................ 389
Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 306 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)...................................... 306 Functions in the telephone menu.......... 307 Notes.................................................... 304 Operating modes................................... 306 Telephone menu overview..................... 306 Wireless charging (mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment)......... 151
Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony............................ 306
Temperature............................................... 175 Temperature grade.................................... 369 Through-loading feature
Locking.................................................. 139 Through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment
Opening................................................. 138 TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. 370 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 365 Tire characteristics................................... 372
Index 575
Tire inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit
Tire information table............................... 365 Tire labeling
Characteristics...................................... 372 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 370 Load index............................................. 372 Load-bearing capacity........................... 372 Maximum tire load................................. 371 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 371 Overview............................................... 369 Speed rating.......................................... 372 Temperature grade................................ 369 Tire Quality Grading............................... 369 Tire size designation.............................. 372 Traction grade....................................... 369 Tread wear grade................................... 369
Tire load (maximum)................................. 371 Tire pressure
Checking (manually).............................. 362 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. 364 Maximum............................................... 371 Notes.................................................... 360
Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 364 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 363 Tire pressure table................................. 361 TIREFIT kit............................................. 340
Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure.................... 364 Checking the tire temperature.............. 364 Function................................................ 363 Restarting.............................................. 364
Tire pressure table.................................... 361 Tire Quality Grading.................................. 369 Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. 364 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 363
Tire tread................................................... 358 Tire-change tool kit
Overview............................................... 380 TIREFIT kit
Storage location.................................... 340
Using..................................................... 340 Tires
Characteristics...................................... 372 Checking............................................... 358 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 362 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system)........................ 364 Definitions............................................. 374 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 370 Flat tire.................................................. 338 Installing................................................ 384 Load index............................................. 372 Load-bearing capacity........................... 372 Maximum tire load................................. 371 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 371 MOExtended tires.................................. 339 Noise..................................................... 358 Notes on installing................................. 377 Overview of tire labeling........................ 369 Removing.............................................. 383 Replacing...................................... 377, 380 Replacing the wheel trim....................... 381 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 364 Rotating................................................. 379
576 Index
Selection............................................... 377 Snow chains.......................................... 359 Speed rating.......................................... 372 Storing.................................................. 380 Temperature grade................................ 369 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 365 Tire pressure (notes)............................. 360 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 363 Tire pressure table................................. 361 Tire Quality Grading............................... 369 Tire size designation.............................. 372 TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Traction grade....................................... 369 Tread wear grade................................... 369 Unusual handling characteristics.......... 358
Toll system Windshield............................................. 174
Tool see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether.................................................... 68 Touch Control
Driver display......................................... 273 Operating.............................................. 282
Touch-sensitive controls............................. 27 Touchscreen
Operating.............................................. 282 Tow-away alarm
Activating/deactivating......................... 103 Function................................................ 103
Tow-bar system......................................... 272 Tow-starting............................................... 353 Towing away............................................... 351 Towing eye
Installing................................................ 353 Storage location.................................... 353
Towing methods........................................ 350 Traction grade........................................... 369 Traffic information
Switching on the display....................... 302 Traffic Light Assistant
Traffic light data service........................ 245 Traffic light data service
Messages on the driver's display........... 245 Traffic light view
Activating/deactivating......................... 244
Information............................................ 244 Traffic Sign Assist
Function/notes...................................... 241 Setting................................................... 244 System limitations................................. 241
Transmission position display.................. 201 Transporting
Loading guidelines................................. 133 Vehicle.................................................. 352
Tread wear grade...................................... 369 Trim element (Care).................................. 334 Trunk box
see EASY-PACK trunk box Trunk lid
Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction........................ 91 Closing.................................................... 85 Emergency release (from inside)............. 90 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 88 Locking separately.................................. 90 Opening................................................... 84 Opening dimensions.............................. 476 Power closing function............................ 85
Index 577
Unlocking (mechanical key)..................... 90 TuneIn
Calling up.............................................. 321 Turn signal indicator................................. 155 Turn signal light
Activating/deactivating......................... 155 Two-way radios
Frequencies........................................... 388 Notes on installation............................. 387 Transmission output (maximum)........... 388
U Unlocking
see Locking/unlocking Unlocking setting........................................ 76 Updates
Important system updates.................... 294 USB port
Rear passenger compartment............... 146 User profiles
Adding a user........................................ 291 Selecting user options........................... 291
V Vehicle
Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 215 Collision detection (parking).................. 213 Correct use............................................. 33 Data acquisition...................................... 35 Data storage............................................ 35 Diagnostics connection........................... 31 Equipment............................................... 26 Limited Warranty..................................... 35 Locking (automatically)........................... 82 Locking (from inside)............................... 80 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 83 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)........... 80 Lowering............................................... 385 Maintenance........................................... 28 Medical aids............................................ 33 Parking for an extended period.............. 214 Problem notification................................ 33 QR code rescue card............................... 35 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 32 Raising................................................... 381 Standby mode function.......................... 214 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 188 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 189
Starting (start/stop button).................. 188 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 207 Towing................................................... 272 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 80 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 93
Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 200 Roof load............................................... 476 Turning circle......................................... 476 Vehicle height........................................ 476 Vehicle length........................................ 476 Vehicle width......................................... 476 Wheelbase............................................. 476
Vehicle data storage Event data recorders............................... 39 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 38
Vehicle dimensions................................... 476 Vehicle electronics
Notes..................................................... 387 Two-way radios...................................... 387
Vehicle identification number see VIN
578 Index
Vehicle identification plate Paint code............................................. 466 VIN........................................................ 466
Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 189
Vehicle key see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada..................... 27
Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Towing eye............................................ 353
Ventilating Convenience opening.............................. 93
Ventilation see Climate control
Vents see Air vents
VIN Identification plate................................ 466 Seat....................................................... 466
Windshield............................................ 466 Vision
Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 178 Windshield heater.................................. 180
W Warning lamp
see Indicator/warning lamp Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle
Removing.............................................. 338 Setting up.............................................. 338
Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ 543 Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... 543 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)......................................... 541 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... 541
J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)........................................ 540 Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 535 Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 536 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)....................... 539 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................ 539 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... 537 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... 537
ESP OFF warning lamp............... 545
ESP warning lamp flashes.......... 544
ESP warning lamp lights up........ 544 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes................................................... 537 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................ 538 H Mercedes me connect warning lamp...................................................... 546
Index 579
Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... 533 Power steering warning lamp (yellow).................................................. 533 Rear axle steering warning lamp (red).............................................. 534 Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)......................................... 534 Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)....................... 540 6 Restraint system warning lamp.... 531 Seat belt warning lamp flashes.... 532 Seat belt warning lamp lights up.......................................................... 532 Suspension warning lamp (red).... 542 Suspension warning lamp (yel low)....................................................... 542 ! The electric parking brake (yel low) indicator lamp................................ 539
h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes..................... 546 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up................... 547 L Warning lamp for distance warning function................................... 542 REAR SEAT AIR BAG................................ 58
Warning/indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. 53
Warranty...................................................... 35 Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care)............................ 331 Water tank
see Air-water duct Weather information................................. 302 Web browsers
Overview................................................ 312 Wheel change
Lowering the vehicle............................. 385 Mounting a new wheel.......................... 384
Removing a wheel................................. 383 Removing/installing hub caps............... 381
Wheel rotation........................................... 379 Wheels
Care...................................................... 333 Checking............................................... 358 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 362 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system)........................ 364 Definitions............................................. 374 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 370 Flat tire.................................................. 338 Installing................................................ 384 Load index............................................. 372 Load-bearing capacity........................... 372 Maximum tire load................................. 371 Maximum tire pressure.......................... 371 MOExtended tires.................................. 339 Noise..................................................... 358 Notes on installing................................. 377 Overview of tire labeling........................ 369 Removing.............................................. 383 Replacing...................................... 377, 380 Replacing the hub cap........................... 381
580 Index
Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system............................................. 364 Rotating................................................. 379 Selection............................................... 377 Snow chains.......................................... 359 Speed rating.......................................... 372 Storing.................................................. 380 Temperature grade................................ 369 Tire and Loading Information placard.... 365 Tire characteristics................................ 372 Tire pressure (notes)............................. 360 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... 363 Tire pressure table................................. 361 Tire Quality Grading............................... 369 Tire size designation.............................. 372 TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Traction grade....................................... 369 Tread wear grade................................... 369 Unusual handling characteristics.......... 358
Wi-Fi Configuring........................................... 295
Window curtain airbag............................... 48 Window lifter
see Side windows
Windows Care...................................................... 333
Windows see Side windows
Windshield Defrosting.............................................. 175 Infrared reflective.................................. 174 Radio waves........................................... 174 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 168 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 170
Windshield see Windshield
Windshield heater..................................... 180 Windshield heater
see Windshield heater Windshield washer fluid
Notes..................................................... 474 Windshield washer system
Topping up............................................. 329 Windshield wipers
Activating/deactivating......................... 167 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 168
Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)................................. 170
Winter operation Activating/deactivating snow chain mode..................................................... 359 Snow chains.......................................... 359
Wiper blades Care...................................................... 333 Replacing............................................... 168 Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL).... 170
Wireless charging Function/notes..................................... 149 Mobile phone......................................... 151 Mobile phone (rear passenger com partment)............................................... 151
Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity........................ 30
Workout
Related manuals for Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the S-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz S-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz S-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2021 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.